An epitome of the whole art of war In two parts. The first of military discipline, containing the whole exercise of the pike and musquet, &c. with plain directions for the various postures. Also the drawing up of battalions, and way of forming them; with the art of doubling, wheeling, forming and drawing up an army into any figure. The way of conducting armies in hilly, woody or plain countries: of encampings, besiegings, giving of battle, &c. The second of fortification and gunnery, which shews the principles and practices of fortification, as now used, as well by the English, as several other European nations, (especially by Their Majesties army) at the late siege of Athlone, Galoway, Limerick, &c. ... Of casements, cittadels, crownworks, ravelins, &c. Of gunnery, ... morters, demy-cannon, &c. with the manner of batteries, &c. All illustrated and further explained by 18 copper-plates, curiously designed and engraven.
         Moxon, Joseph, 1627-1691.
      
       
         
           1692
        
      
       Approx. 149 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 72 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2005-12 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A51540
         Wing M3002
         ESTC R217907
         99829550
         99829550
         33990
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A51540)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 33990)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 1920:15)
      
       
         
           
             An epitome of the whole art of war In two parts. The first of military discipline, containing the whole exercise of the pike and musquet, &c. with plain directions for the various postures. Also the drawing up of battalions, and way of forming them; with the art of doubling, wheeling, forming and drawing up an army into any figure. The way of conducting armies in hilly, woody or plain countries: of encampings, besiegings, giving of battle, &c. The second of fortification and gunnery, which shews the principles and practices of fortification, as now used, as well by the English, as several other European nations, (especially by Their Majesties army) at the late siege of Athlone, Galoway, Limerick, &c. ... Of casements, cittadels, crownworks, ravelins, &c. Of gunnery, ... morters, demy-cannon, &c. with the manner of batteries, &c. All illustrated and further explained by 18 copper-plates, curiously designed and engraven.
             Moxon, Joseph, 1627-1691.
             J. S., Capt. Military discipline.
             J. S., Capt. Fortification and military discipline.
          
           [16], 66, 51-70 p., [18] leaves of plates : port., tables
           
             printed for J. Moxon, at the sign of Atlas in Warwick-Lane,
             London :
             1692.
          
           
             By Joseph Moxon, who has signed the dedication: J.M.
             "The epitome shares some of its plates .. and some of its text with" Captain John Stevens' Military discipline, 1685, and his Fortification and military discipline, 1688. Cf. MS. note following p. 70 of British Library copy C 175.ff.23.
             Some of the plates are numbered.
             Text is continuous despite pagination.
             Reproduction of the original in the British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Military art and science -- Early works to 1800.
           Military art and science -- England -- Early works to 1800.
           Fortification -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2005-02 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2005-02 Aptara
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2005-04 Rachel Losh
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2005-04 Rachel Losh
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2005-10 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
         
           
             
               GULIELMUS
               D
               :
               Gratiae
               ,
               Angliae
               ,
               Scotioa
               ▪
               Franciae
               ,
               et
               Hiberniae
               REX
               Fidei
               Defensor
               etc
               ,
               F.
               H.
               Van.
               Hove
               .
               Sculp
               :
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           AN
           EPITOME
           Of
           the
           Whole
           Art
           of
           War.
           
        
         
           In
           TWO
           PARTS
           .
        
         
           The
           First
           of
           Military
           Discipline
           ,
           Containing
           the
           whole
           Exercise
           of
           the
           Pike
           and
           Musquet
           ,
           &c.
           with
           plain
           Directions
           for
           the
           various
           Postures
           .
           Also
           the
           Drawing
           up
           of
           Battalions
           ,
           and
           way
           of
           Forming
           them
           ;
           with
           the
           Art
           of
           Doubling
           ,
           Wheeling
           ,
           Forming
           and
           Drawing
           up
           an
           Army
           into
           any
           Figure
           .
           The
           way
           of
           Conducting
           Armies
           in
           Hilly
           ,
           Woody
           or
           Plain
           Countries
           :
           Of
           Encampings
           ,
           Besiegings
           ,
           giving
           of
           Battle
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           The
           Second
           of
           Fortification
           and
           Gunnery
           ,
           which
           shews
           the
           Principles
           and
           Practice
           of
           Fortification
           ,
           as
           now
           used
           ,
           as
           well
           by
           the
           English
           ,
           as
           several
           other
           European
           Nations
           ,
           (
           Especially
           by
           Their
           Majesties
           Army
           )
           at
           the
           late
           Sieges
           of
           
             Athlene
             ,
             Galoway
             ,
             Limerick
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           Measures
           and
           Dimensions
           of
           Rampires
           ,
           Parapets
           ,
           Moats
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           Of
           Casements
           ,
           Cittadels
           ,
           Crownworks
           ,
           Ravelins
           ,
           &c.
           Of
           Gunnery
           ,
           the
           qualifications
           of
           a
           Gunner
           .
           Of
           Ordnance
           ,
           Morters
           ,
           Demy-Cannon
           ,
           &c.
           with
           the
           manner
           of
           Batteries
           ,
           &c.
           All
           Illustrated
           and
           further
           Explained
           by
           18
           Copper-Plates
           ,
           curiously
           designed
           and
           Engraven
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           for
           
             J.
             Moxon
          
           ,
           at
           the
           Sign
           of
           Atlas
           in
           Warwick-Lane
           ,
           1692.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           To
           the
           Honourable
           CHRISTOPHER
           SEATON
           ,
           Brother
           to
           the
           Right
           Honourable
           George
           Earl
           of
           Winton
           ,
           &c.
           And
           my
           Worthy
           Friend
           .
        
         
           
             Honoured
             Sir
             !
          
        
         
           I
           Here
           present
           you
           this
           Epitome
           of
           the
           whole
           
             Art
             of
             Warr
          
           ,
           and
           recommend
           it
           to
           your
           serious
           Inspection
           and
           Approbation
           ;
           Depending
           more
           upon
           the
           Worth
           of
           the
           Subject
           ,
           than
           my
           own
           Deserts
           :
           'T
           was
           chiefly
           design'd
           for
           the
           Vse
           and
           Benefit
           of
           Young
           Gentlemen
           and
           Others
           that
           delight
           therein
           :
           And
           though
           't
           is
           but
           small
           in
           Bulk
           ,
           yet
           great
           in
           Matter
           ;
           and
           at
           this
           
           time
           of
           as
           good
           use
           ,
           when
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           Europe
           are
           engag'd
           in
           Warr.
           What
           can
           be
           more
           Acceptable
           in
           a
           time
           of
           such
           Eminent
           Action
           ,
           than
           Plain
           and
           Practical
           Instructions
           in
           the
           Military
           Arts
           ,
           here
           comprehended
           under
           these
           two
           Heads
           ,
           
             viz.
             Military
             Discipline
          
           ,
           and
           Fortification
           .
           Sir
           ,
           I
           need
           not
           endeavour
           to
           inform
           you
           of
           its
           most
           excellent
           use
           ,
           under
           the
           Fortitude
           of
           whose
           favourable
           Aspect
           ,
           this
           small
           Piece
           craves
           a
           shelter
           from
           the
           
             Malevolent
             Rays
          
           of
           Detractions
           .
           These
           are
           the
           Arts
           Mathematical
           (
           or
           Branches
           thereof
           ,
           )
           and
           in
           the
           Mathematicks
           the
           two
           main
           Pillars
           are
           well
           known
           to
           be
           Arithmetick
           and
           Geometry
           ;
           and
           these
           also
           have
           the
           Preheminence
           above
           all
           other
           Arts
           ,
           because
           they
           leave
           no
           Hole
           to
           creep
           out
           at
           ,
           or
           any
           Querk
           for
           Descent
           ,
           but
           an
           Everlasting
           Addition
           
           of
           new
           Inventions
           to
           what
           has
           been
           happily
           demonstrated
           before
           .
           This
           last
           Age
           doth
           enjoy
           the
           Benefit
           of
           more
           admirable
           Inventions
           ,
           than
           many
           former
           Ages
           ;
           and
           we
           see
           daily
           that
           new
           ones
           are
           still
           added
           ,
           both
           in
           the
           Art
           of
           Warr
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           divers
           other
           Arts
           and
           Sciences
           .
           Have
           we
           not
           in
           our
           Age
           seen
           the
           spots
           in
           the
           Sun
           first
           discovered
           by
           the
           famous
           Galareus
           ,
           with
           his
           most
           excellent
           Telescope
           Observations
           ;
           also
           his
           Conversion
           upon
           his
           own
           Axis
           ,
           the
           
             Lateral
             Guardians
          
           or
           Satillites
           of
           Saturn
           and
           Jupiter
           ,
           the
           various
           Phases
           of
           Mars
           ,
           the
           Horns
           of
           Venus
           and
           Mercury
           ,
           the
           Mountains
           and
           Seas
           of
           the
           Moon
           ,
           the
           Generation
           of
           
             Comets
             ,
             cum
             multis
             aliis
          
           ?
           But
           I
           fear
           I
           have
           run
           out
           too
           far
           for
           this
           small
           Treatise
           .
           Sir
           !
           't
           is
           the
           Censure
           of
           You
           alone
           which
           I
           value
           ,
           the
           Popular
           
           voice
           ,
           like
           other
           Agents
           ,
           never
           acting
           beyond
           their
           proper
           sphere
           of
           activity
           .
           Thus
           craving
           the
           Continuance
           of
           Your
           Favour
           and
           Respect
           ,
           I
           shall
           ever
           remain
           ,
        
         
           
             Honourable
             Sir
             !
          
           
             Your
             Devoted
             and
             very
             Humble
             Servant
             ,
             J.
             M.
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           A
           CATALOGUE
           OF
           Globes
           ,
           Celestial
           and
           Terrestrial
           Spheres
           ,
           Maps
           ,
           Sea-Plates
           ,
           Mathematical
           Instruments
           and
           Books
           ,
           Made
           and
           Sold
           by
           J.
           Moxon
           ,
           at
           the
           Sign
           of
           Atlas
           in
           Warwick-lane
           .
        
         
           GLOBES
           26
           Inches
           the
           Diameter
           .
           The
           Price
           20
           l.
           the
           pair
           .
        
         
           Globes
           near
           15
           Inches
           Diameter
           .
           The
           Price
           4
           l.
           
        
         
           Globes
           8
           Inches
           Diamer
           .
           The
           Price
           2
           l.
           
        
         
           Globes
           6
           Inches
           Diameter
           .
           The
           Price
           1
           l.
           10
           s.
           
        
         
           The
           
             English
             Globe
          
           ,
           invented
           by
           the
           Right
           Hononrable
           the
           Earl
           of
           Castlemain
           ,
           12
           Inches
           Diameter
           .
           The
           Price
           ordinary
           made
           up
           40
           s.
           and
           with
           the
           Projection
           at
           Bottom
           50
           s.
           Best
           made
           up
           5
           l.
           
        
         
           
             Concave
             Hemispheres
          
           of
           the
           
             Starry
             Orb
          
           ;
           which
           serves
           for
           a
           Case
           to
           a
           
             Terrestrial
             Globe
          
           3
           Inches
           Diameter
           ,
           made
           portable
           for
           the
           Pocket
           .
           Price
           15
           s.
           
        
         
           Spheres
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           
             Copernican
             Hypothesis
          
           ,
           both
           General
           and
           Particular
           ,
           20
           Inches
           Diameter
           .
           Price
           of
           the
           General
           5
           l.
           of
           the
           Particular
           6
           l.
           of
           both
           together
           10
           l.
           
        
         
         
           Spheres
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Ptolomaick
           System
           14
           Inches
           Diameter
           .
           Price
           3
           l.
           
        
         
           Spheres
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Ptolomaick
           System
           ,
           8
           Inches
           Diameter
           .
           Price
           1
           l.
           10
           s.
           
        
         
           
           Gunter's
           Quadrant
           ,
           12
           Inches
           Radius
           ,
           printed
           on
           Paper
           ,
           and
           pasted
           on
           a
           Board
           ,
           with
           a
           Nocturnal
           on
           the
           back-side
           .
           Price
           5
           s.
           
        
         
           
           Gunter's
           Quadrant
           ,
           4
           Inches
           Radius
           ,
           printed
           on
           Paper
           ,
           and
           pasted
           on
           Brass
           ,
           with
           a
           Nocturnal
           on
           the
           back-side
           ,
           and
           a
           Wooden
           Case
           covered
           with
           Leather
           fit
           for
           it
           .
           A
           new
           Invention
           contrived
           for
           the
           Pocket
           .
           Price
           6
           s.
           
        
         
           A
           large
           
             Map
             of
             the
             World
          
           ,
           10
           Foot
           long
           ,
           and
           7
           Foot
           deep
           ,
           pasted
           on
           Cloth
           and
           coloured
           .
           Price
           2
           l.
           
        
         
           A
           
             Map
             of
             all
             the
             World
          
           ,
           4
           Foot
           long
           ,
           and
           3
           Foot
           deep
           ,
           pasted
           on
           Cloth
           and
           coloured
           .
           Price
           10
           s.
           in
           Sheets
           2
           s.
           6
           d.
           
        
         
           A
           
             Map
             of
             the
             English
             Empire
          
           in
           America
           ,
           describing
           all
           Places
           inhabited
           here
           by
           the
           English
           Nation
           ,
           as
           well
           on
           the
           Islands
           as
           on
           the
           Continent
           .
           Price
           15
           s.
           
        
         
           Six
           
             Scriptural
             Maps
          
           ,
           1.
           
           Of
           all
           the
           Earth
           ,
           and
           how
           after
           the
           Flood
           it
           was
           divided
           among
           the
           Sons
           of
           Noah
           .
           2.
           
           Of
           Paradise
           or
           the
           
             Garden
             of
             Eden
          
           ,
           with
           the
           Countries
           circumjacent
           inhabited
           by
           the
           Patriarchs
           .
           3.
           
           The
           40
           Years
           travel
           of
           the
           Children
           of
           Israel
           through
           the
           Wilderness
           .
           4.
           
           Of
           Canaan
           ,
           or
           the
           
             Holy
             Land
          
           ,
           and
           how
           it
           was
           divided
           among
           the
           twelve
           Tribes
           of
           Israel
           ,
           and
           Travelled
           through
           by
           our
           Saviour
           and
           his
           Apostles
           .
           5.
           
           The
           Travels
           of
           〈◊〉
           ,
           and
           others
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           in
           their
           propagating
           the
           Gospel
           .
           6.
           
           Jerusalem
           ,
           as
           it
           
           stood
           in
           our
           Saviour's
           time
           ;
           with
           a
           Book
           of
           Explanations
           to
           these
           Maps
           ,
           Entituled
           ,
           
             Sacred
             Geography
          
           .
           Price
           6
           s.
           Useful
           to
           be
           Bound
           up
           with
           Bibles
           .
        
         
           A
           Sea-Plate
           ,
           or
           Map
           of
           all
           the
           World
           ,
           according
           to
           Mercator
           ,
           in
           two
           large
           Royal
           Sheets
           of
           Paper
           ;
           set
           forth
           by
           Mr.
           
             Edward
             Wright
          
           ,
           and
           newly
           corrected
           by
           
             Joseph
             Moxon
          
           ,
           &c.
           Price
           2
           s.
           
        
         
           Sea-Plats
           for
           Sailing
           to
           all
           Parts
           of
           the
           World.
           Price
           6
           d.
           the
           Sheet
           .
        
         
           The
           famous
           City
           of
           Batavia
           in
           the
           East-Indies
           ,
           built
           and
           inhabited
           by
           the
           Dutch
           ,
           curiously
           Engraved
           ,
           and
           Printed
           on
           four
           large
           Sheets
           of
           Royal-Paper
           .
           Price
           2
           s.
           6
           d.
           
        
         
           A
           small
           Map
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           with
           Descriptions
           ,
           on
           one
           Sheet
           .
           Price
           6
           d.
           
        
         
           A
           
             New
             Map
          
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Ireland
           ,
           in
           one
           Royal
           Sheet
           of
           Paper
           .
           Price
           1
           s.
           by
           
             J.
             Moxon
          
           .
        
         
           A
           
             New
             Map
             of
             England
          
           ,
           shewing
           the
           Roads
           from
           Edinburgh
           to
           London
           ,
           in
           two
           Sheets
           .
           Price
           1
           s.
           by
           
             J.
             Moxon
          
           .
        
         
           A
           
             New
             Map
             of
             Scotland
          
           ,
           in
           one
           Royal
           Sheet
           .
           Price
           1
           s.
           by
           
             J.
             Moxon
          
           .
        
         
           North
           and
           South
           Hemespheres
           16
           Inches
           Diameter
           ,
           projected
           on
           the
           Poles
           of
           the
           World
           ;
           the
           South
           ,
           according
           to
           Mr
           
           Haley's
           Observation
           ,
           with
           a
           Horizon
           .
           Price
           ,
           in
           Sheets
           ,
           2
           s.
           6
           d.
           Made
           up
           6
           s.
           
        
         
           
           
             BOOKS
             .
          
           
             A
             
               Tutor
               to
               Astronomy
               and
               Geography
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Use
             of
             both
             the
             
               Globes
               ,
               Celestial
            
             and
             Terrestial
             ;
             by
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             A
             Member
             of
             the
             Royal
             Society
             ,
             and
             Hydrographer
             to
             the
             Kings
             most
             Excellent
             Majesty
             .
             Price
             5
             s.
             
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             
               Copernican
               Spheres
            
             ,
             teaching
             to
             Solve
             the
             Phoenomena
             by
             them
             ,
             as
             easily
             as
             by
             the
             
               Ptolomaick
               Spheres
            
             ;
             by
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             Price
             4
             s.
             
          
           
             
             Wright's
             Correction
             of
             Errors
             in
             the
             Art
             of
             Navigation
             .
             Price
             8
             s.
             
          
           
             New
             and
             rare
             Inventions
             of
             Water-works
             ,
             teaching
             how
             to
             raise
             Water
             higher
             than
             the
             Spring
             .
             By
             which
             Invention
             ,
             the
             Perpetual
             Motion
             is
             proposed
             ,
             many
             hard
             Labours
             performed
             ,
             and
             varieties
             of
             Motion
             and
             Sounds
             produced
             .
             By
             
               Isaac
               de
               Caus
            
             ,
             Engineer
             to
             King
             Charles
             the
             First
             .
             Price
             8
             s.
             
          
           
             
               Practical
               perspective
            
             ,
             or
             
               Perspective
               made
               easie
            
             .
             Teaching
             by
             the
             Opticks
             how
             to
             delineate
             all
             Bodies
             ,
             Buildings
             ,
             and
             Landskips
             ,
             &c.
             
             By
             the
             Catoptricks
             ,
             how
             to
             delineate
             confused
             Appearances
             ,
             so
             as
             when
             seen
             in
             a
             Mirrour
             or
             Polish'd
             Body
             of
             any
             intended
             Shape
             ,
             the
             Reflection
             shall
             shew
             a
             Design
             .
             By
             the
             Dioptricks
             ,
             how
             to
             draw
             part
             of
             many
             Figures
             into
             one
             ,
             when
             seen
             through
             a
             Glass
             or
             Crystal
             cut
             into
             many
             Faces
             .
             By
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             Price
             7
             s.
             
          
           
           
             An
             exact
             Survay
             of
             the
             Microcosm
             ,
             being
             an
             Anatomy
             of
             the
             Bodies
             of
             Man
             and
             Woman
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Skin
             ,
             Veins
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Muscles
             ,
             Bones
             ,
             Sinews
             ,
             and
             Ligaments
             are
             acurately
             delineated
             .
             Engraven
             on
             large
             Copper-plates
             ,
             Printed
             and
             curiously
             pasted
             together
             ,
             so
             as
             at
             first
             sight
             you
             may
             behold
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             Man
             and
             Woman
             ;
             and
             by
             turning
             up
             of
             several
             Dissections
             of
             the
             Papers
             ,
             take
             a
             view
             of
             all
             their
             inwards
             ;
             with
             Alphabetical
             References
             to
             the
             Names
             of
             every
             Member
             and
             part
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             Set
             forth
             in
             Latin
             by
             Remelinus
             and
             
               Michael
               Sapher
            
             of
             Tyrol
             ;
             and
             Englished
             by
             
               John
               Ireton
            
             ,
             Chyrurgion
             ;
             and
             lastly
             ,
             perused
             and
             corrected
             by
             several
             Anatomists
             .
             Price
             14
             s.
             
          
           
             Vignola
             ,
             or
             the
             
               Compleat
               Architect
            
             ;
             shewing
             a
             plain
             and
             easie
             way
             the
             Rules
             of
             the
             Five
             Orders
             in
             Architecture
             ,
             viz.
             
               Tuscan
               ,
               Dorick
               ,
               Ionick
               ,
               Corinthian
               ,
            
             and
             Composite
             ;
             whereby
             any
             that
             can
             but
             read
             and
             understand
             English
             ,
             may
             readily
             learn
             the
             Proportions
             that
             all
             members
             in
             a
             Building
             have
             to
             one
             another
             :
             Set
             forth
             by
             Mr.
             
               James
               Barrozzio
            
             of
             Vignola
             ,
             and
             Translated
             into
             English
             by
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             Price
             3
             s.
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             Christiologio
             ,
             Or
             a
             brief
             but
             true
             Account
             of
             the
             certain
             Year
             ,
             Month
             ,
             Day
             ,
             and
             Minute
             of
             the
             Birth
             of
             
               Jesus
               Christ.
            
             By
             
               John
               Butler
            
             ,
             B.
             D.
             and
             Chaplain
             to
             his
             Grace
             James
             Duke
             of
             Ormond
             ,
             &c.
             and
             Rector
             of
             Lichborough
             in
             the
             Diocess
             of
             Peterborough
             .
             Price
             3
             s.
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             A
             
               Tutor
               to
               Astrology
            
             ,
             or
             
               Astrology
               made
               easie
            
             :
             being
             a
             plain
             Introduction
             to
             the
             whole
             Art
             of
             Astrology
             ;
             whereby
             the
             meanest
             Apprehension
             
             may
             learn
             to
             Erect
             a
             Figure
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             same
             to
             give
             a
             determined
             Judgment
             upon
             any
             question
             or
             Nativity
             whatsoever
             .
             Also
             New
             Tables
             of
             Houses
             ,
             calculated
             for
             the
             Latitude
             of
             51
             degr
             .
             32
             minutes
             ;
             Also
             Tables
             of
             Right
             and
             Oblique
             Ascentions
             to
             6
             degr
             .
             of
             Latitude
             .
             Whereunto
             is
             added
             an
             Ephemeris
             for
             three
             Years
             ,
             with
             all
             other
             necessary
             Tables
             that
             belong
             to
             the
             Art
             of
             Astrology
             .
             Also
             to
             Erect
             a
             Figure
             the
             Rational
             way
             ,
             by
             the
             Tables
             of
             Triangles
             ,
             more
             methodically
             than
             hath
             yet
             been
             published
             ,
             digested
             into
             a
             small
             Pocket
             Volume
             ,
             for
             the
             conveniency
             of
             those
             that
             Erect
             Figures
             abroad
             .
             By
             
               W.
               Eland
            
             .
             Price
             ●
             s.
             
          
           
             
               Mathematicks
               made
               easie
            
             ,
             or
             a
             
               Mathematical
               Dictionary
            
             ,
             Explaining
             the
             Terms
             of
             Art
             ,
             and
             Difficult
             Phrases
             used
             in
             
               Arithmetick
               ,
               Geometry
               ,
               Astronomy
               ,
               Astrology
               ,
            
             and
             other
             
               Mathematical
               Sciences
            
             .
             By
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             The
             2d
             .
             Edit
             .
             Corrected
             and
             much
             Enlarged
             .
             Price
             Bound
             3
             s.
             
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             a
             Mathematical
             Instrument
             called
             a
             Quadrant
             ;
             shewing
             very
             plainly
             and
             easily
             to
             know
             the
             exact
             Height
             and
             Distance
             of
             any
             Steeple
             ,
             Tree
             ,
             or
             House
             ,
             &c.
             
             Also
             to
             know
             the
             Hour
             of
             the
             Day
             by
             it
             ;
             the
             Height
             of
             the
             Sun
             ,
             Moon
             ,
             or
             Stars
             ;
             and
             to
             know
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Sun-Rising
             ,
             and
             the
             Length
             of
             every
             Day
             in
             the
             Year
             ;
             the
             place
             of
             the
             Sun
             in
             the
             Ecliptick
             ,
             the
             Azimuth
             ,
             Right
             Ascension
             ,
             and
             Declination
             of
             the
             Sun
             ;
             with
             many
             other
             necessary
             and
             delightful
             Conclusions
             :
             performed
             very
             readily
             .
             Also
             the
             Use
             of
             the
             Nocturnal
             ,
             whereby
             you
             may
             learn
             to
             know
             the
             Stars
             in
             
             Heaven
             and
             the
             Hour
             of
             the
             Night
             by
             them
             ;
             with
             many
             other
             delightful
             Operations
             .
             Price
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             A
             brief
             Discourse
             of
             a
             passage
             of
             the
             North-Pole
             to
             
               Japan
               ,
               China
            
             ,
             &c.
             pleaded
             by
             three
             Experiments
             ,
             and
             Answers
             to
             all
             Objections
             that
             can
             be
             urged
             against
             a
             Passage
             that
             way
             .
             As
             ,
             1.
             
             By
             a
             Navigation
             into
             the
             North-Pole
             ,
             and
             two
             Degrees
             beyond
             it
             .
             2.
             
             By
             a
             Navigation
             from
             Japan
             towards
             the
             North-Pole
             .
             3.
             
             By
             an
             Experiment
             made
             by
             the
             Czar
             of
             Muscovy
             ,
             whereby
             it
             appears
             ,
             that
             to
             the
             Northward
             of
             
               Nova
               Zembla
            
             is
             a
             free
             and
             open
             Sea
             as
             far
             as
             
               Japan
               ,
               China
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             With
             a
             Map
             of
             all
             the
             discovered
             Land
             nearest
             to
             the
             Pole.
             By
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             Price
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             
               Regulae
               Trium
               Ordinum
               Literarum
               Typographicarum
            
             ;
             Or
             the
             Rules
             of
             the
             three
             Orders
             of
             Print-letters
             ,
             viz.
             the
             
               Roman
               ,
               Italick
            
             ,
             and
             English
             ,
             Capitals
             and
             small
             ;
             shewing
             how
             they
             are
             compounded
             of
             
               Geometrick
               Figures
            
             ,
             and
             mostly
             made
             by
             Rule
             and
             Compass
             :
             Useful
             for
             Writing-Masters
             ,
             Painters
             ,
             Carvers
             ,
             Masons
             ,
             and
             others
             that
             are
             lovers
             of
             Curiosity
             .
             By
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             Price
             5
             s
          
           
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             
               Astronomical
               Playing-Cards
            
             ,
             teaching
             an
             ordinary
             Capacity
             by
             them
             to
             be
             acquainted
             with
             all
             the
             Stars
             in
             Heaven
             ,
             to
             know
             their
             Places
             ,
             Colours
             ,
             Natures
             and
             Bignesses
             .
             Also
             the
             Poetical
             Reasons
             for
             every
             Constellation
             .
             Very
             useful
             ,
             pleasant
             ,
             and
             delightful
             for
             all
             lovers
             of
             Ingenuity
             .
             By
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             Price
             6
             d.
             
          
           
           
             The
             
               Astronomical
               Cards
            
             ,
             by
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Price
             plain
             1
             s.
             Coloured
             2
             s.
             best
             coloured
             ,
             and
             the
             Stars
             guilt
             5
             s.
             
          
           
             
               Geographical
               Playing-Cards
            
             ,
             wherein
             is
             exactly
             described
             all
             the
             Kingdoms
             of
             the
             Earth
             ,
             curiously
             engraved
             .
             Price
             plain
             1
             s.
             coloured
             2
             s
             best
             coloured
             and
             gilt
             5
             s.
             the
             Pack
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Genteel
               House-keepers
               pastime
            
             ;
             or
             ,
             the
             Mode
             of
             Carving
             at
             the
             Table
             ,
             represented
             in
             a
             pack
             of
             Playing-Cards
             .
             By
             which
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Instructions
             in
             the
             Book
             ,
             any
             ordinary
             Capacity
             may
             learn
             how
             to
             cut
             up
             ,
             or
             Carve
             in
             mode
             ,
             all
             the
             most
             usual
             Dishes
             of
             
               Flesh
               ,
               Fish
               ,
               Fowl
            
             ,
             and
             
               Baked
               Meats
            
             :
             And
             how
             to
             make
             the
             several
             Services
             of
             the
             same
             at
             the
             Table
             ;
             with
             the
             several
             Sawces
             and
             Garnishes
             proper
             to
             each
             Dish
             of
             Meat
             .
             Set
             forth
             by
             several
             of
             the
             best
             Masters
             in
             the
             Faculty
             of
             Carving
             ,
             and
             published
             for
             publick
             use
             .
             Price
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             
               Carving
               Cards
            
             ,
             By
             the
             best
             Carvers
             at
             the
             Lords
             Mayors
             Table
             .
             Price
             1
             s.
             
          
           
             
               Compendium
               Euclidis
               Curiosi
            
             :
             Or
             ,
             
               Geometrical
               Operations
            
             ,
             Shewing
             with
             one
             single
             opening
             of
             the
             Compasses
             ,
             and
             a
             straight
             Ruler
             ,
             all
             the
             proportions
             of
             
             Euclid's
             first
             five
             Books
             are
             performed
             .
             Translated
             out
             of
             Dutch
             into
             English
             ,
             by
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Price
             1
             s.
             
          
           
             An
             Introduction
             to
             the
             Art
             of
             Species
             ;
             by
             Sir
             
               Jonas
               Moor.
            
             Price
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             Two
             Tables
             of
             Ranges
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Degrees
             of
             Mounture
             ;
             by
             
               Henry
               Bo●d
            
             ,
             Senior
             .
             Price
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             
               Mechanick
               Exercises
            
             :
             Or
             ,
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Handy-works
             ,
             in
             9
             Monthly
             Exercises
             .
             The
             
             first
             Three
             ,
             viz.
             Numb
             .
             I.
             Numb
             .
             II.
             Numb
             .
             III.
             teaching
             the
             
               Art
               of
               Smithing
            
             .
             The
             second
             Three
             ,
             viz.
             Numb
             .
             IV.
             Numb
             .
             V.
             Numb
             .
             VI.
             teaching
             the
             
               Art
               of
               Joynery
            
             .
             The
             third
             Three
             ,
             viz.
             Numb
             .
             VII
             .
             Numb
             .
             VIII
             .
             Numb
             .
             IX
             .
             teaching
             the
             
               Art
               of
               House-Carpentery
            
             .
             Accommodated
             with
             suitable
             Engraved
             Figures
             :
             by
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Price
             of
             each
             Monthly
             Exercise
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             
               Mechanick
               Dialling
            
             ;
             Teaching
             any
             man
             ,
             though
             of
             an
             ordinary
             Capacity
             ,
             and
             unlearned
             in
             the
             Mathematicks
             ,
             to
             draw
             a
             true
             Sun-Dial
             on
             any
             
               Given
               Plain
            
             ,
             however
             situated
             ;
             only
             with
             the
             help
             of
             a
             streight
             Rule
             and
             a
             pair
             of
             Compasses
             ,
             and
             without
             any
             Arithmetical
             Calculation
             :
             by
             
               Joseph
               Moxon
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Price
             1
             s.
             6
             d.
             
          
           
             At
             the
             place
             aforesaid
             ,
             you
             may
             have
             also
             all
             manner
             of
             Maps
             ,
             Sea-Plats
             ,
             Drafts
             ,
             Mathematical
             Books
             ,
             Instruments
             ,
             &c.
             at
             the
             lowest
             Prizes
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             Invented
             by
             the
             Right
             Honourable
             the
             Earl
             of
             Castlemain
             ,
             a
             new
             kind
             of
             Globe
             ,
             call'd
             (
             for
             distinction
             sake
             )
             the
             
               English
               Globe
            
             ;
             being
             a
             fix'd
             and
             immovable
             one
             ,
             performing
             what
             the
             Ordinary
             ones
             do
             ,
             and
             much
             more
             ,
             even
             without
             their
             usual
             Appendancies
             ;
             as
             
               Wooden
               Horizons
               ,
               Brazen
               Meridians
               ,
               Vertical
               Circles
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             For
             it
             Composes
             it self
             to
             the
             Site
             and
             Position
             of
             the
             World
             without
             the
             Mariner's
             Compass
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             Forreign
             help
             ;
             and
             besides
             other
             useful
             and
             surprising
             Operations
             ,
             (
             relating
             both
             to
             the
             Sun
             and
             Moon
             ,
             and
             perform'd
             by
             the
             Shade
             alone
             )
             we
             have
             by
             it
             not
             
             only
             the
             constant
             proportion
             of
             Perpendiculars
             to
             their
             Shade
             ,
             with
             several
             Corollaries
             thence
             arising
             ,
             but
             also
             an
             easie
             ,
             new
             ,
             and
             most
             compendious
             way
             of
             describing
             Dials
             on
             all
             Plains
             ,
             as
             well
             Geometrically
             as
             Mechanically
             :
             most
             of
             which
             may
             be
             taught
             any
             one
             in
             few
             Hours
             ,
             though
             never
             so
             unacquainted
             with
             Mathematicks
             .
          
           
             To
             this
             is
             added
             ,
             on
             the
             Pedestal
             ,
             a
             Projection
             of
             all
             the
             appearing
             Constellations
             in
             this
             Horizon
             ,
             with
             their
             Figures
             and
             Shapes
             .
             And
             besides
             ,
             several
             new
             things
             in
             it
             differing
             from
             the
             Common
             Astrolabe
             ,
             (
             tending
             to
             a
             clearer
             and
             quicker
             way
             of
             Operating
             )
             the
             very
             Principles
             of
             all
             Steriographical
             Projections
             are
             laid
             down
             and
             Mathematically
             demonstrated
             ;
             as
             is
             of
             every
             thing
             else
             of
             moment
             throughout
             the
             whole
             Treatise
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           AN
           EPITOME
           Of
           the
           whole
           ART
           of
           WAR
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           In
           two
           Parts
           .
        
         
           THE
           extraordinary
           Benefit
           of
           the
           Noble
           Science
           called
           Military
           Discipline
           ,
           with
           that
           Mathematical
           Art
           called
           Fortification
           ,
           or
           Military
           Architecture
           ,
           is
           so
           well
           known
           ,
           that
           it
           stands
           not
           in
           need
           of
           my
           commendation
           :
           and
           therefore
           to
           speak
           any
           thing
           thereto
           were
           but
           to
           light
           a
           Candle
           before
           the
           Sun.
           In
           the
           managing
           of
           these
           Subjects
           I
           shall
           endeavour
           to
           be
           very
           plain
           and
           easie
           ;
           calculating
           them
           so
           as
           to
           be
           understood
           even
           by
           the
           meanest
           Capacities
           ;
           And
           first
           .
        
         
           
           
             Of
             Exercising
             .
          
           
             AS
             soon
             as
             the
             Regiment
             is
             drawn
             into
             Battalia
             ,
             the
             Commander
             in
             Chief
             is
             to
             place
             himself
             before
             the
             Centre
             of
             the
             Pikes
             ,
             about
             six
             Paces
             from
             them
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             be
             more
             easily
             understood
             by
             the
             whole
             Body
             ;
             and
             that
             he
             may
             the
             better
             observe
             what
             is
             done
             ,
             he
             is
             to
             be
             on
             Horse-back
             .
             The
             Serjeants
             are
             to
             be
             placed
             two
             on
             each
             Rank
             ,
             the
             Right
             and
             Left
             ;
             The
             remainder
             always
             to
             be
             in
             the
             Rere
             ,
             making
             a
             Rank
             parallel
             to
             the
             Souldiers
             at
             three
             Paces
             distant
             from
             the
             last
             Rank
             .
             The
             Drums
             are
             to
             be
             disposed
             of
             ,
             one
             half
             on
             the
             Right
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             on
             the
             Left
             ,
             ranging
             directly
             with
             the
             first
             Rank
             of
             the
             Soldiers
             .
             The
             H●boys
             to
             be
             on
             the
             Right
             of
             the
             Drums
             .
             The
             Commission-Officers
             ▪
             are
             to
             take
             their
             Posts
             at
             the
             head
             of
             the
             Battalions
             as
             the
             Colours
             are
             drawn
             .
          
           
             The
             words
             of
             Command
             ought
             to
             be
             given
             very
             leisurely
             and
             distinctly
             ;
             and
             silence
             is
             to
             be
             kept
             very
             strictly
             :
             And
             in
             order
             thereunto
             the
             first
             word
             of
             Command
             before
             you
             begin
             the
             Exercise
             is
             Silence
             .
          
           
             The
             next
             word
             of
             Command
             is
             
               Files
               open
               to
               the
               Right
            
             (
             or
             to
             the
             Left
             )
             
               to
               your
               Order
               ,
               March.
            
             
          
           
             At
             which
             word
             every
             Man
             turns
             to
             the
             hand
             named
             ,
             and
             the
             Serjeants
             on
             the
             Flank
             lead
             the
             Ranks
             ,
             which
             are
             then
             Files
             ,
             directly
             forward
             with
             their
             Halberts
             advanced
             .
             In
             this
             order
             no
             Man
             is
             to
             stir
             till
             his
             Leader
             be
             at
             least
             four
             foot
             from
             him
             ,
             
             and
             then
             to
             move
             keeping
             at
             that
             distance
             ;
             when
             the
             Officer
             sees
             the
             Files
             are
             opened
             enough
             the
             next
             word
             of
             Command
             is
             
               Halt
               ,
               as
               you
               were
               ,
               or
               to
               your
               Leader
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Captains
             and
             Lieutenants
             always
             carry
             their
             Pikes
             Comported
             when
             they
             move
             to
             the
             Right
             or
             Left
             ,
             and
             the
             Colours
             are
             advanced
             .
             The
             Serjeants
             are
             to
             be
             very
             mindful
             to
             keep
             the
             Ranks
             even
             ,
             and
             at
             12
             large
             feet
             distance
             ,
             and
             the
             Files
             at
             three
             .
          
           
             The
             next
             thing
             is
             the
             Chief
             Officer
             gives
             this
             word
             of
             command
             ,
             to
             the
             Officers
             at
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Battalion
             (
             
               Have
               a
               care
               of
               the
               Exercise
            
             ;
             )
             at
             which
             word
             of
             command
             the
             Musquetiers
             are
             to
             pull
             off
             their
             right-hand
             Gloves
             ,
             and
             put
             them
             under
             their
             Girdles
             ;
             and
             the
             Pike-men
             are
             to
             joyn
             their
             lest
             hands
             to
             their
             Pikes
             even
             with
             their
             Shoulders
             .
             Then
             (
             
               Officers
               take
               your
               Post
               of
               Exercise
               in
               the
               Rear
               ,
               March.
            
             )
          
           
             The
             Officers
             facing
             to
             the
             right
             about
             ,
             the
             Captains
             marching
             in
             one
             Rank
             ,
             and
             the
             Lieutenants
             and
             Ensigns
             in
             another
             ,
             till
             they
             come
             into
             the
             Rear
             ,
             and
             place
             themselves
             in
             Ranks
             ,
             the
             first
             thirteen
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             eleven
             Paces
             from
             the
             Souldiers
             .
             And
             at
             the
             same
             time
             six
             of
             the
             Serjeants
             at
             the
             Rear
             ,
             march
             through
             the
             intervals
             of
             the
             Files
             into
             the
             Front
             ,
             and
             post
             themselves
             six
             paces
             advanced
             before
             the
             chief
             Officer
             ,
             where
             they
             are
             to
             range
             themselves
             into
             a
             parallel
             Line
             with
             the
             Battalion
             to
             keep
             the
             Front
             clear
             .
          
           
             
               The
               Musquetiers
               being
               shouldred
               ,
               the
               Pikes
               advanced
               ,
               and
               silence
               commanded
               ,
               the
               Officer
               in
               chief
               proceeds
               as
               followeth
               .
            
             Viz.
             Order
             your
             
             Pikes
             ,
             to
             the
             Right
             ,
             to
             the
             Right
             ,
             to
             the
             Right
             ,
             to
             the
             Right
             ,
             to
             the
             Right
             about
             ;
             as
             you
             were
             .
             To
             the
             left
             ,
             to
             the
             left
             ,
             to
             the
             left
             ,
             to
             the
             left
             :
             To
             the
             left
             about
             ;
             as
             you
             were
             .
          
           
             
               Rules
               for
               the
               Exercise
               of
               the
               Fire-Lock
               .
            
             
               THE
               Soldiers
               must
               take
               care
               of
               the
               carrying
               their
               Arms
               ;
               and
               be
               sure
               that
               they
               make
               no
               motion
               until
               the
               word
               of
               command
               be
               given
               and
               ended
               .
            
             
               Musquetiers
               have
               a
               care
               of
               the
               Exercise
               ;
               carry
               your
               Arms
               well
               .
               Here
               you
               must
               note
               that
               if
               it
               be
               a
               single
               Exercise
               ,
               the
               Command
               is
               :
               1.
               
               Soulder
               your
               Musquets
               .
               2.
               
               Lay
               your
               right-hand
               to
               your
               Musquets
               .
               3.
               
               Poise
               your
               Musquets
               .
               4.
               
               Rest
               your
               Musquets
               .
               5.
               
               Cock
               your
               Musquets
               .
               6.
               
               Guard
               your
               Musquets
               .
               7.
               
               Present
               .
               8.
               
               Fire
               .
               9.
               
               Recover
               your
               Musquets
               .
               10.
               
               Half
               bend
               ,
               or
               half
               cock
               your
               Musquets
               .
               11.
               
               Clean
               your
               Pans
               .
               12.
               
               Handle
               your
               Primers
               .
               13.
               
               Prime
               .
               14.
               
               Shut
               your
               Pans
               .
               15.
               
               Blow
               of
               your
               loose
               Corns
               .
               16.
               
               Cast
               about
               to
               Charge
               .
               17.
               
               Handle
               your
               Chargers
               .
               18.
               
               Open
               them
               with
               your
               Teeth
               .
               19.
               
               Charge
               with
               Powder
               .
               20.
               
               Draw
               forth
               your
               Scowrers
               .
               21.
               
               Shorten
               them
               to
               an
               inch
               .
               22.
               
               Charge
               with
               Bullet
               .
               23.
               
               Ram
               down
               Powder
               and
               Ball.
               24.
               
               Withdraw
               your
               Scowrers
               .
               25.
               
               Shorten
               them
               to
               a
               Handful
               .
               26.
               
               Return
               your
               Scowrers
               .
               27.
               
               Poise
               your
               Musquets
               .
               28.
               
               Shoulder
               your
               Musquets
               .
               29.
               
               Poise
               your
               Musquets
               .
               30.
               
               Order
               your
               Musquets
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Rules
               for
               the
               Exercise
               of
               the
               Pike
               .
            
             
               PIke-men
               take
               heed
               .
               Advance
               your
               Pikes
               .
               To
               the
               Front
               ,
               Charge
               .
               To
               the
               Right
               (
               4
               times
               .
               )
               Charge
               .
               To
               the
               Right-about
               .
               Charge
               .
               As
               you
               were
               .
               To
               the
               left
               (
               4
               times
               )
               Charge
               .
               To
               the
               Left
               about
               .
               Charge
               .
               As
               you
               were
               .
               Charge
               .
               Advance
               your
               Pikes
               .
               Shoulder
               your
               Pikes
               .
               Charge
               to
               the
               Front.
               As
               you
               were
               .
               Charge
               to
               the
               Right
               .
               As
               you
               were
               .
               Charge
               to
               the
               Right
               about
               .
               As
               you
               were
               .
               Charge
               to
               the
               Left.
               As
               you
               were
               .
               Charge
               to
               the
               left
               about
               ,
               As
               you
               were
               .
               Port
               ,
               Comport
               .
               Charge
               to
               the
               Front.
               Traile
               .
               Charge
               .
               As
               you
               were
               .
               Advance
               your
               Pikes
               .
               Musquetiers
               take
               heed
               .
               Poise
               your
               Musquets
               .
               Shoulder
               your
               Musquets
               .
               Musquetiers
               make
               ready
               .
            
          
           
             
               The
               manner
               of
               the
               Exercise
               of
               the
               Pike
               and
               Musquet
               together
               .
            
             
               
                 MVsquetiers
                 make
                 ready
              
               .
               At
               the
               pronouncing
               these
               words
               of
               Command
               (
               the
               Pikes
               being
               advanced
               ,
               and
               the
               Musquets
               shouldred
               )
               the
               Musquetiers
               are
               to
               perform
               distinctly
               every
               posture
               of
               the
               Musquet
               together
               ,
               and
               being
               ready
               (
               which
               is
               understood
               to
               be
               Cock't
               )
               they
               are
               to
               guard
               them
               with
               their
               thumbs
               on
               their
               Cocks
               ,
               and
               bring
               up
               their
               Musquets
               streight
               before
               them
               ,
               their
               left
               hands
               the
               height
               of
               their
               mouths
               .
               Both
               Pike-men
               and
               Musquetiers
               always
               observing
               when
               ever
               they
               recover
               their
               arms
               before
               them
               ,
               to
               bring
               their
               right
               heels
               to
               their
               left
               insteeps
               ;
               and
               when
               the
               Pikes
               charge
               ,
               and
               the
               Musquets
               rest
               ,
               to
               fall
               back
               with
               their
               right
               feet
               in
               a
               direct
               line
               .
               Then
               
                 to
                 the
                 Right
              
               (
               4
               times
               )
               
                 Charge
                 .
                 To
                 the
                 Right
                 about
                 ,
              
               Charge
               .
               
                 As
                 you
                 
                 were
                 ,
                 Charge
                 .
                 To
                 the
                 left
              
               (
               4
               times
               )
               
                 Charge
                 .
                 To
                 the
                 left
                 about
                 .
                 Charge
                 .
                 As
                 you
                 were
                 .
                 Charge
                 .
                 Recover
                 your
                 Arms.
                 Half
                 bend
                 your
                 Musquets
                 .
                 Poise
                 your
                 Musquets
                 .
                 Shoulder
                 your
                 Musquets
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 Pike-men
                 are
                 to
                 bring
                 their
                 Pikes
                 from
                 their
                 Recover
                 to
                 their
                 Advance
                 .
              
               Poise
               your
               Musquets
               .
               
                 Here
                 the
                 Piekmen
                 are
                 to
                 joyn
                 their
                 left
                 hands
                 to
                 their
                 Pikes
                 even
                 to
                 their
                 shoulders
                 .
              
               Then
               ,
               Order
               your
               Arms
               is
               the
               next
               word
               of
               command
               .
               In
               ordering
               their
               Arms
               they
               must
               be
               sure
               to
               make
               a
               little
               stop
               before
               the
               But-end
               comes
               to
               the
               ground
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               come
               down
               altogether
               at
               once
               .
               
                 Pikes
                 to
                 your
                 inside
                 Order
                 .
                 Lay
                 down
                 your
                 Arms.
                 Quit
                 your
                 Arms.
              
               After
               laying
               down
               their
               Arms
               and
               quitting
               them
               ,
               they
               are
               all
               to
               stand
               up
               together
               .
               
                 To
                 the
                 right
                 about
              
               .
               March.
               When
               the
               Soldiers
               have
               laid
               down
               their
               Arms
               and
               quitting
               them
               ,
               upon
               beat
               of
               Drum
               ,
               they
               are
               all
               to
               draw
               their
               Swords
               ,
               and
               run
               to
               their
               Arms
               observing
               always
               to
               keep
               the
               points
               of
               their
               Swords
               upright
               for
               fear
               of
               mischief
               .
               When
               they
               lay
               their
               right
               hands
               on
               their
               Swords
               ,
               they
               must
               take
               hold
               of
               their
               Scabbards
               with
               their
               left
               hand
               .
               Then
               ,
               the
               next
               word
               is
               .
               
                 Return
                 you
                 Swords
              
               .
               When
               they
               return
               their
               Swords
               ,
               they
               must
               do
               it
               all
               at
               one
               motion
               .
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Arms
                 :
                 Pikes
                 to
                 your
                 outside
                 order
                 .
                 Poise
                 your
                 Musquets
                 .
                 Shoulder
                 your
                 Musquets
                 .
                 Advance
                 your
                 Pikes
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Officers
                 take
                 your
                 Posts
                 at
                 the
                 head
                 of
                 the
                 Battalion
                 ▪
                 March.
              
               Here
               all
               the
               Officers
               are
               to
               march
               back
               in
               the
               same
               method
               to
               the
               Front
               of
               the
               Batalion
               as
               they
               went
               from
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Directions
               for
               the
               several
               Postures
               in
               exercising
               of
               the
               Musquet
               and
               Pike
               ;
               and
               ,
               first
               ,
               of
               the
               Musquet
               .
            
             
               HE
               that
               designs
               to
               be
               a
               Soldier
               ,
               or
               become
               an
               Artist
               in
               Arms
               ,
               ought
               ,
               in
               the
               first
               place
               ,
               to
               learn
               and
               practise
               the
               Postures
               of
               his
               Arms
               ,
               a
               Posture
               being
               a
               Mode
               or
               Garb
               that
               we
               are
               used
               unto
               in
               the
               well-handling
               of
               our
               Arms.
               1.
               
               Silence
               is
               an
               excellent
               Virtue
               ,
               and
               observe
               for
               all
               ,
               That
               in
               the
               Exercise
               both
               of
               Pike
               and
               Musquet
               ,
               the
               Feet
               are
               to
               be
               at
               a
               moderate
               distance
               ;
               for
               if
               they
               are
               too
               wide
               asunder
               ,
               or
               too
               near
               together
               ,
               it
               weakens
               ▪
               and
               be
               sure
               to
               keep
               your
               left
               heel
               fast
               ,
               and
               to
               set
               your
               feet
               exactly
               ,
               or
               else
               you
               can
               never
               handle
               your
               Arms
               as
               you
               ought
               .
            
             
               
                 Lay
                 your
                 right
                 hand
                 on
                 your
                 Musquet
                 .
              
               Turn
               the
               Barrel
               toward
               you
               ,
               the
               Lock
               uppermost
               ,
               and
               lay
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               (
               the
               fingers
               extended
               )
               just
               behind
               the
               Lock
               ,
               close
               the
               but-end
               of
               your
               Musquet
               to
               your
               shoulder
               ,
               that
               the
               Muzzels
               may
               be
               all
               of
               a
               height
               .
            
             
               
                 Poise
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               Grasp
               your
               Musquet
               hard
               ,
               facing
               to
               the
               right
               with
               a
               quick
               motion
               upon
               your
               left
               heel
               ,
               keeping
               your
               Musquet
               directly
               before
               you
               the
               height
               of
               your
               Cravat
               ,
               your
               right
               elbow
               on
               your
               side
               ,
               your
               feet
               neither
               too
               near
               nor
               at
               too
               great
               a
               distance
               ,
               but
               so
               ,
               that
               by
               turning
               the
               point
               of
               the
               left
               toe
               to
               the
               Front
               ,
               and
               that
               of
               your
               right
               as
               you
               face
               ,
               your
               left
               heel
               being
               exactly
               against
               the
               middle
               of
               your
               right
               foot
               ,
               you
               are
               in
               the
               posture
               for
               resting
               ;
               
               which
               is
               the
               reason
               of
               facing
               to
               the
               right
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               be
               in
               a
               readier
               posture
               to
               rest
               .
            
             
               
                 Rest
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               Let
               your
               Musquet
               sink
               down
               to
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               and
               receive
               the
               Musquet
               into
               it
               ,
               just
               where
               the
               Scowrer
               enters
               into
               the
               Stock
               ,
               not
               touching
               the
               Barrel
               ,
               keeping
               your
               right
               hand
               upon
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               behind
               the
               Lock
               ,
               let
               your
               Musquet
               be
               held
               a
               little
               sloping
               ,
               about
               half
               a
               foot
               from
               your
               side
               ,
               as
               low
               as
               you
               can
               without
               stooping
               .
            
             
               
                 Cock
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               Place
               your
               right
               thumb
               upon
               the
               Cock
               ,
               and
               your
               fingers
               behind
               the
               Trigger
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               help
               of
               closing
               it
               to
               your
               thigh
               ,
               you
               cock
               it
               ,
               keeping
               it
               still
               rested
               with
               your
               thumb
               upon
               the
               Cock.
               
            
             
               
                 Guard
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               ;
               keeping
               your
               thumb
               upon
               the
               Cock
               ,
               and
               your
               fingers
               behind
               the
               Trigger
               ,
               you
               bring
               up
               your
               Musquet
               with
               a
               very
               quick
               motion
               streight
               before
               you
               to
               the
               Recover
               ,
               your
               left
               hand
               as
               high
               as
               your
               mouth
               ,
               about
               half
               a
               foot
               from
               it
               ,
               without
               stooping
               ,
               bringing
               your
               right
               heel
               to
               your
               left
               in
               step
               .
            
             
               Present
               .
               Fall
               back
               with
               your
               right
               foot
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               left
               heel
               be
               against
               the
               middle
               of
               it
               ,
               raising
               the
               but-end
               of
               your
               Musquet
               to
               your
               shoulder
               ,
               your
               right
               elbow
               not
               higher
               than
               your
               Piece
               ,
               bending
               your
               left
               knee
               ,
               and
               keeping
               the
               right
               very
               stiff
               ,
               and
               your
               Musquet
               being
               level'd
               breast-high
               ,
               with
               your
               fingers
               upon
               the
               Trigger
               .
            
             
               Fire
               .
               Then
               be
               sure
               to
               draw
               the
               Trigger
               at
               one
               motion
               ,
               keeping
               your
               body
               steddy
               ,
               taking
               good
               aim
               ,
               and
               keeping
               your
               Musquet
               fast
               to
               your
               shoulder
               ,
               until
               you
               have
               the
               Word
               of
               Command
               .
            
             
             
               
                 Recover
                 your
                 Arms.
              
               Sink
               the
               but-end
               of
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               till
               you
               hold
               it
               upright
               in
               both
               hands
               ,
               the
               left
               hand
               alwaies
               as
               high
               as
               your
               mouth
               ,
               and
               the
               right
               under
               the
               Lock
               ,
               bring
               up
               your
               Musquet
               with
               a
               very
               quick
               motion
               ,
               and
               your
               right
               heel
               to
               your
               left
               instep
               .
            
             
               
                 Half
                 bend
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               ,
               falling
               back
               with
               your
               right
               Leg
               ,
               bring
               your
               Musquet
               to
               the
               Rest
               ,
               laying
               your
               right
               Thumb
               upon
               the
               Cock
               ,
               and
               your
               Fingers
               behind
               the
               Trigger
               ,
               half
               bend
               it
               ,
               by
               putting
               it
               close
               to
               your
               Thigh
               ,
               and
               then
               keeping
               your
               Musquet
               rested
               .
            
             
               
                 Clean
                 your
                 Pan
              
               ;
               pressing
               the
               Ball
               of
               your
               Thumb
               into
               the
               Pan
               ,
               you
               wipe
               it
               :
               having
               done
               that
               ,
               hold
               your
               Musquet
               in
               your
               right
               hand
               behind
               the
               Lock
               .
            
             
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Primer
              
               :
               Take
               hold
               of
               the
               great
               end
               of
               it
               ,
               between
               the
               Thumb
               and
               fore-finger
               of
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               your
               Arm
               backward
               .
            
             
               Prime
               .
               At
               which
               time
               you
               must
               level
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               to
               be
               exactly
               upon
               a
               line
               ,
               and
               then
               put
               Powder
               into
               your
               pan
               .
            
             
               
                 Shut
                 your
                 Pan
              
               with
               your
               two
               first
               Fingers
               ,
               and
               casting
               back
               your
               Primer
               ,
               bring
               your
               Musquet
               to
               the
               Recover
               ,
               as
               there
               directed
               ,
               keeping
               your
               Thumb
               on
               the
               top
               of
               the
               Steel
            
             
               
                 Blow
                 off
                 your
                 loose
                 Corns
              
               .
               Be
               sure
               to
               blow
               all
               together
               :
               bring
               your
               Pan
               up
               to
               your
               mouth
               ,
               standing
               upright
               ,
               blow
               off
               the
               loofe
               Corns
               ,
               then
               let
               your
               Musquet
               sink
               into
               the
               posture
               it
               was
               in
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 Cast
                 about
                 to
                 Charge
              
               :
               you
               advance
               with
               your
               right
               leg
               ,
               turning
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               the
               barrel
               downwards
               ,
               bringing
               it
               to
               the
               left
               side
               a
               little
               backwards
               in
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               keeping
               your
               right-foot-toe
               
               directly
               to
               the
               Front
               ,
               and
               your
               right
               heel
               over
               against
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               left
               foot
               ,
               ballancing
               your
               Musquet
               in
               the
               left
               hand
               ,
               the
               right
               hand
               joyned
               to
               the
               Muzzle
               ,
               which
               must
               be
               held
               directly
               to
               the
               front
               ,
               a
               foot
               from
               your
               body
               .
            
             
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Charger
              
               .
               Take
               it
               full
               in
               your
               hand
               ,
               and
               place
               it
               underneath
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               about
               an
               inch
               from
               the
               Muzzle
               .
            
             
               
                 Open
                 it
                 with
                 your
                 Teeth
              
               .
               Bring
               it
               up
               to
               your
               mouth
               ,
               standing
               upright
               with
               your
               Head
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               bring
               your
               Head
               down
               to
               it
               :
               Assoon
               as
               you
               have
               done
               this
               ,
               bring
               the
               Charger
               within
               an
               inch
               of
               the
               Muzzle
               underneath
               ,
               as
               before
               ,
               and
               cover
               the
               mouth
               of
               your
               Charger
               with
               the
               Ball
               of
               your
               Thumb
               .
            
             
               
                 Charge
                 with
                 Powder
              
               .
               Put
               the
               Charge
               of
               powder
               into
               the
               barrel
               ,
               then
               hold
               your
               Charger
               again
               underneath
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 Draw
                 forth
                 your
                 Scourer
              
               .
               Now
               let
               fall
               your
               Charger
               ,
               and
               turn
               your
               hand
               ,
               your
               little-finger
               next
               the
               Muzzle
               ,
               and
               draw
               it
               at
               three
               motions
               ;
               being
               drawn
               ,
               dart
               it
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               hold
               it
               level
               to
               the
               height
               of
               your
               Eye
               ,
               your
               Arm
               extended
               .
            
             
               
                 Shorten
                 it
                 to
                 an
                 inch
              
               .
               Turn
               the
               great
               end
               of
               your
               Scowrer
               towards
               you
               ,
               and
               slip
               your
               hand
               till
               within
               an
               inch
               of
               the
               end
               ,
               letting
               it
               rest
               against
               your
               body
               ,
               a
               little
               below
               your
               right
               breast
               ,
               sloped
               all
               of
               a
               height
               .
            
             
               
                 Charge
                 with
                 Bullet
              
               .
               Take
               the
               Bullet
               out
               of
               your
               mouth
               ,
               putting
               it
               into
               the
               barrel
               ,
               and
               then
               put
               the
               great
               end
               of
               the
               Scourer
               after
               it
               ,
               just
               into
               the
               Muzzle
               of
               the
               Piece
               ,
               and
               so
               stand
               till
               the
               next
               word
               of
               command
               .
            
             
             
               
                 Ram
                 down
                 Powder
                 and
                 Ball.
              
               Which
               is
               done
               by
               holding
               a
               handful
               of
               the
               Scowrer
               in
               your
               hand
               ,
               and
               your
               thumb
               on
               the
               top
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               
                 Withdraw
                 your
                 Scowrer
              
               .
               Turn
               your
               hand
               ,
               your
               thumb
               and
               fore-finger
               towards
               the
               Muzzle
               ,
               and
               when
               your
               Scowrer
               is
               clear
               ,
               which
               is
               to
               be
               done
               at
               three
               motions
               ,
               dart
               again
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 Shorten
                 it
                 to
                 an
                 handful
              
               .
               Turn
               the
               small
               end
               of
               the
               Scowrer
               to
               your
               breast
               ,
               and
               slip
               your
               hand
               till
               within
               an
               handful
               of
               the
               end
               of
               it
               ,
               holding
               it
               to
               your
               body
               ,
               as
               before
               directed
               .
            
             
               
                 Return
                 your
                 Scowrer
              
               .
               Re-place
               it
               in
               the
               Stock
               of
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               pressing
               it
               down
               with
               your
               thumb
               ;
               then
               alwaies
               remember
               to
               grasp
               the
               Muzzle
               of
               your
               Musquet
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               your
               thumb
               streight
               out
               upon
               the
               Scowrer
               ,
               keeping
               your
               Musquet
               clear
               from
               your
               side
               some
               half
               a
               foot
               ,
               the
               Muzzels
               all
               of
               a
               height
               ,
               directly
               to
               the
               front
               .
            
             
               
                 Poise
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               With
               your
               left
               hand
               bring
               up
               your
               Musquet
               before
               you
               ,
               and
               falling
               with
               your
               right
               leg
               even
               with
               your
               left
               ,
               grasp
               your
               Musquet
               under
               the
               Lock
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               poise
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               Shoulder
               your
               Musquet
               as
               formerly
               :
               
                 Poise
                 as
                 before
              
               .
            
             
               Order
               .
               Sink
               your
               right
               hand
               a
               little
               ;
               take
               hold
               of
               the
               Stock
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               upon
               the
               place
               where
               the
               Scowrer
               goes
               into
               the
               Stock
               ,
               then
               sinking
               that
               hand
               ,
               take
               hold
               of
               the
               Muzzle
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               let
               the
               but-end
               sink
               to
               the
               ground
               ,
               close
               to
               the
               right
               foot
               ,
               the
               Lock
               outwards
               .
            
             
             
               
                 Lay
                 down
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               Turn
               your
               Musquet
               with
               the
               Lock
               upwards
               ,
               and
               step
               forwards
               with
               your
               left
               leg
               and
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               lay
               it
               upon
               the
               ground
               in
               a
               streight
               line
               .
            
             
               
                 Quit
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               Fall
               back
               with
               your
               left
               leg
               even
               to
               the
               right
               ,
               and
               stand
               up
               .
            
             
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               Step
               forwards
               with
               your
               left
               leg
               ,
               and
               lay
               your
               right
               hand
               near
               the
               Muzzle
               of
               your
               Musquet
               .
            
             
               
                 Order
                 your
                 Musquet
              
               .
               Lift
               up
               the
               Muzzle
               of
               your
               Musquet
               ,
               and
               fall
               back
               with
               your
               left
               leg
               even
               to
               the
               right
               ,
               turning
               the
               Lock
               of
               your
               Musquet
               outwards
               ,
               by
               the
               middle
               of
               your
               foot
               .
            
          
           
             
               Directions
               for
               the
               several
               Postures
               in
               exercising
               of
               the
               PIKE
               .
            
             
               
                 ADvance
                 your
                 Pikes
              
               .
               With
               your
               right
               hand
               lift
               upright
               your
               Pike
               as
               high
               as
               you
               can
               well
               reach
               ,
               and
               take
               it
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               as
               low
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               and
               raise
               it
               till
               the
               but-end
               comes
               into
               the
               right
               hand
               ,
               then
               bring
               it
               between
               your
               breast
               and
               shoulder
               upright
               close
               to
               your
               thigh
               .
            
             
               
                 To
                 the
                 Front.
              
               Lay
               your
               left
               hand
               on
               your
               Pike
               even
               with
               the
               top
               of
               your
               shoulder
               ,
               and
               bring
               the
               Pike
               streight
               upright
               before
               you
               with
               a
               quick
               motion
               ▪
               drawing
               in
               your
               right
               heel
               to
               your
               left
               instep
               .
            
             
               Charge
               Fall
               back
               with
               your
               right
               leg
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               heel
               of
               your
               left
               foot
               may
               be
               directly
               against
               the
               middle
               of
               your
               right
               foot
               :
               Bring
               down
               your
               Pike
               extream
               quick
               ,
               with
               a
               jerk
               ,
               and
               charge
               Breast
               high
               ;
               your
               left
               Elbow
               under
               your
               Pike
               to
               support
               it
               ,
               yielding
               your
               body
               forwards
               ,
               and
               bending
               your
               left
               Knee
               ,
               with
               your
               feet
               at
               a
               convenient
               distance
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               stand
               strong
               ,
               
               always
               holding
               the
               But-end
               of
               your
               Pike
               in
               the
               Palm
               of
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               your
               left
               foot
               pointing
               in
               a
               strait
               line
               with
               your
               Pike
               .
            
             
               
                 To
                 the
                 Right
                 four
                 times
              
               .
               Turn
               your
               left
               Toe
               to
               the
               right
               ;
               Bring
               up
               your
               right
               heel
               to
               your
               left
               Insteps
               and
               your
               Pike
               recovered
               straight
               before
               you
               with
               as
               quick
               a
               motion
               as
               in
               Charging
               :
               Then
               having
               turned
               ,
               fall
               back
               with
               your
               right
               leg
               as
               before
               .
               Charge
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 To
                 the
                 right
                 about
              
               .
               Turn
               your
               left
               Toe
               to
               the
               right
               about
               ;
               bringing
               your
               right
               Heel
               as
               before
               ,
               and
               your
               Pike
               recovered
               charge
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 As
                 you
                 were
              
               .
               You
               turn
               your
               left
               Toe
               to
               the
               left
               about
               ,
               bringing
               up
               your
               Pike
               recovered
               ,
               your
               left
               hand
               never
               to
               be
               higher
               than
               your
               Mouth
               ,
               and
               your
               right
               Heel
               as
               before
               ;
               and
               being
               turned
               ,
               you
               fall
               back
               with
               your
               Right
               Leg
               and
               Charge
               .
               You
               must
               be
               sure
               always
               to
               bring
               your
               Pike
               streight
               up
               ,
               and
               not
               to
               swing
               it
               about
               ,
               for
               then
               't
               will
               clatter
               against
               the
               other
               Pikes
               .
            
             
               
                 To
                 the
                 Left
                 ,
                 Four
                 times
                 .
                 To
                 the
                 Left
                 about
                 .
                 As
                 you
                 were
                 .
                 Advance
                 your
                 Pikes
                 .
              
               Bringing
               up
               your
               Right
               Heel
               to
               your
               Left
               Instep
               ,
               and
               your
               Pike
               first
               before
               you
               ,
               you
               fall
               out
               with
               your
               Right
               Foot
               even
               with
               your
               Left
               ,
               and
               bring
               your
               Pike
               to
               your
               Shoulder
               .
            
             
               Shoulder
               .
               Lay
               your
               Left
               Hand
               on
               your
               Pike
               even
               with
               your
               Shoulder
               ;
               fall
               back
               with
               your
               Right
               Leg
               ,
               and
               put
               back
               your
               Right
               Arm
               as
               far
               as
               you
               well
               can
               ,
               holding
               your
               Pike
               half
               a
               Foot
               from
               your
               side
               ,
               then
               taking
               off
               your
               Left
               Hand
               ,
               bring
               up
               your
               Right
               Leg
               ,
               and
               lay
               your
               Pike
               on
               your
               Right
               Shoulder
               ,
               your
               Elbow
               close
               to
               your
               Body
               ,
               the
               butt-end
               half
               a
               Foot
               from
               the
               ground
               .
            
             
             
               
                 Charge
                 to
                 the
                 Front.
              
               Fall
               back
               with
               your
               Right
               Leg
               ,
               and
               put
               back
               your
               Right
               Arm
               as
               far
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               be
               sure
               to
               keep
               the
               Spear
               directly
               to
               the
               Reer
               ,
               and
               your
               Pike
               sloaped
               at
               the
               same
               heighth
               with
               the
               Spear
               as
               when
               it
               was
               Shouldered
               ,
               neither
               higher
               not
               lower
               .
               
                 Vide
                 Charge
              
               .
            
             
               
                 Shoulder
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 were
              
               .
               You
               must
               now
               raise
               your
               Pike
               with
               both
               your
               Hands
               ,
               then
               leaving
               it
               with
               the
               Right
               Hand
               ,
               and
               turning
               the
               Head
               backwards
               with
               the
               Left
               ,
               take
               hold
               again
               with
               the
               Right
               ,
               as
               high
               as
               you
               can
               reach
               with
               ease
               ,
               bringing
               up
               your
               Right
               leg
               ,
               taking
               off
               your
               Left
               Hand
               from
               your
               Pike
               ,
               Shoulder
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 Charge
                 to
                 the
                 Right
              
               .
               Bring
               your
               Pike
               up
               ,
               and
               turn
               the
               butt-end
               backwards
               by
               your
               Right
               side
               ,
               taking
               it
               in
               the
               Palm
               of
               your
               Right
               Hand
               ,
               turning
               your
               Body
               to
               the
               Right
               upon
               your
               Left
               Foot
               ,
               with
               your
               Right
               Leg
               behind
               your
               Left
               ,
               and
               Charge
               as
               before
               .
            
             
               
                 Shoulder
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 were
              
               .
               Raise
               your
               Pike
               with
               both
               Hands
               ,
               then
               turn
               about
               to
               the
               Left
               ,
               bringing
               your
               Feet
               as
               formerly
               directed
               ,
               then
               with
               your
               Left
               hand
               turn
               your
               head
               of
               the
               Pike
               to
               the
               Right
               :
               Then
               taking
               hold
               of
               it
               with
               your
               Right
               Hand
               ,
               hold
               it
               in
               both
               hands
               ,
               at
               a
               little
               distance
               from
               your
               Body
               as
               before
               ,
               sloped
               at
               the
               same
               height
               as
               when
               Shouldered
               ,
               then
               bringing
               up
               your
               Right
               Leg
               ,
               lay
               it
               on
               your
               Shoulder
               .
            
             
               
                 Charge
                 to
                 the
                 Right
                 about
              
               .
               Fall
               back
               with
               your
               Leg
               and
               Hand
               as
               before
               ,
               and
               stand
               with
               your
               Pike
               in
               the
               same
               Posture
               ,
               then
               upon
               your
               Left
               Foot
               ,
               turn
               to
               the
               Right
               about
               ,
               bring
               the
               Butt-end
               of
               your
               Pike
               to
               the
               right
               side
               ,
               falling
               back
               with
               your
               right
               Leg
               ,
               level
               your
               Pike
               Breast
               high
               ,
               and
               Charge
               .
            
             
             
               
                 As
                 you
                 were
              
               .
               Turn
               to
               the
               Left
               about
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               Left
               Hand
               ,
               bring
               the
               Butt-end
               of
               your
               Pike
               by
               your
               left
               side
               ,
               keeping
               the
               Speer-point
               exactly
               to
               the
               Reer
               ,
               the
               same
               height
               as
               before
               ,
               then
               laying
               your
               Right
               Hand
               as
               high
               as
               you
               can
               well
               reach
               ,
               hold
               it
               from
               your
               Body
               as
               before
               ,
               then
               bring
               up
               your
               Right
               Leg
               and
               Shoulder
               .
            
             
               
                 Charge
                 to
                 the
                 Left.
              
               Fall
               back
               with
               your
               Leg
               and
               Arm
               as
               in
               the
               rest
               ,
               and
               turn
               to
               the
               Lest
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               Left
               Hand
               turn
               the
               Butt-end
               of
               the
               Pike
               to
               the
               Right
               ,
               and
               bring
               up
               your
               Right
               Leg.
               Charge
               .
            
             
               
                 As
                 you
                 were
              
               .
               Bring
               your
               Pike
               over
               your
               Head
               with
               your
               Left
               Hand
               ;
               falling
               back
               with
               your
               Right
               Leg
               ,
               and
               puting
               back
               your
               Right
               Arm
               as
               before
               ,
               bring
               up
               the
               Right
               Leg
               ,
               and
               Shoulder
               .
            
             
               Port.
               As
               Charging
               to
               the
               Front
               ,
               but
               that
               you
               sink
               not
               the
               Spear
               of
               your
               Pike
               so
               low
               ,
               and
               instead
               of
               letting
               the
               Pike
               rest
               upon
               your
               Left
               Elbow
               ,
               't
               is
               to
               rest
               between
               the
               Thumb
               and
               Fore-finger
               ,
               and
               your
               Elbow
               close
               to
               your
               side
               .
            
             
               Comport
               .
               You
               bring
               your
               Left
               Hand
               as
               far
               back
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               and
               stretching
               out
               the
               Right
               at
               the
               same
               time
               ,
               step
               forwards
               with
               your
               right
               Foot
               ,
               grasp
               your
               Pike
               with
               your
               Right
               Hand
               ,
               then
               leaving
               it
               with
               your
               Left
               Hand
               ,
               fall
               back
               with
               the
               Right
               Leg
               even
               with
               your
               Left
               ,
               close
               the
               Pike
               to
               your
               side
               ,
               the
               Spear
               of
               your
               Pike
               about
               the
               height
               of
               your
               Head.
               
            
             
               
                 Charge
                 to
                 the
                 Front.
              
               Extend
               your
               Right
               Arm
               as
               much
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               advancing
               your
               Right
               Leg
               at
               the
               same
               motion
               ,
               and
               putting
               your
               Left
               Hand
               as
               far
               back
               as
               you
               can
               ,
               bring
               forward
               your
               Pike
               ;
               then
               stepping
               back
               with
               your
               Right
               Leg
               ,
               take
               hold
               
               of
               the
               butt-end
               of
               it
               with
               your
               Right
               hand
               ,
               when
               you
               
                 Charge
                 ,
                 Charge
              
               always
               Breast
               high
               .
            
             
               Trail
               .
               Face
               to
               the
               Right
               about
               ,
               and
               let
               the
               Spear
               of
               your
               Pike
               fall
               behind
               you
               ;
               quit
               your
               Right
               Hand
               from
               the
               butt-end
               of
               it
               ,
               without
               stirring
               your
               Left.
               
            
             
               
                 Charge
                 as
                 you
                 were
              
               .
               Turn
               to
               the
               Left
               about
               ,
               and
               taking
               the
               butt-end
               of
               the
               Pike
               on
               the
               Palm
               of
               your
               Right
               Hand
               .
               Charge
               .
            
             
               
                 Advance
                 your
                 Pikes
              
               .
               Bring
               up
               your
               Right
               Heel
               to
               your
               Left
               Instep
               ,
               and
               your
               Pike
               before
               you
               to
               the
               Recover
               ,
               you
               fall
               out
               with
               your
               Right
               Foot
               even
               with
               your
               Left
               ,
               and
               bring
               your
               Pike
               to
               your
               
                 Right
                 Thigh
              
               .
            
             
               
                 Order
                 your
                 Pikes
              
               .
               Lay
               your
               Left
               Hand
               on
               your
               Pike
               ,
               even
               with
               the
               top
               of
               your
               Shoulder
               ,
               then
               sinking
               your
               Left
               Hand
               ,
               take
               hold
               of
               it
               with
               your
               Right
               Hand
               so
               ,
               as
               when
               the
               butt-end
               of
               it
               is
               upon
               the
               Ground
               ,
               your
               Right
               Hand
               may
               be
               against
               your
               Eye
               ,
               keeping
               your
               Pike
               near
               your
               Head
               ,
               and
               the
               butt-end
               near
               the
               Latchet
               of
               your
               Shooe.
               
            
             
               
                 Pikes
                 to
                 your
                 inside
                 Order
              
               .
               Move
               the
               butt-end
               of
               your
               Pike
               on
               the
               inside
               of
               the
               middle
               of
               your
               Right
               Foot.
               
            
             
               
                 Lay
                 down
                 your
                 Pike
              
               .
               Step
               forward
               quick
               with
               your
               Left
               Leg
               ,
               lay
               it
               down
               strait
               with
               your
               Right
               Hand
               .
            
             
               
                 Quit
                 your
                 Pikes
              
               .
               Bring
               back
               your
               Left
               Leg
               even
               to
               your
               Right
               ,
               and
               stand
               up
               altogether
               .
            
             
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Pikes
              
               .
               Step
               forward
               with
               your
               Left
               Leg
               quick
               ,
               placing
               the
               middle
               of
               your
               Right
               Foot
               against
               the
               but-end
               of
               your
               Pike
               ,
               lay
               your
               
               Right
               Hand
               on
               your
               Pike
               as
               far
               as
               you
               can
               reach
               .
            
             
               
                 Order
                 your
                 Pikes
              
               .
               Raise
               the
               Pike
               with
               your
               Right
               Hand
               only
               ,
               and
               fall
               back
               with
               your
               Left
               Leg.
               
            
             
               
                 Pikes
                 to
                 your
                 Outside
                 Order
              
               .
               Place
               the
               butt-end
               of
               your
               Pike
               at
               the
               middle
               ,
               on
               the
               outside
               of
               your
               Foot.
               Advance
               ,
               As
               before
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               PLATE
               I.
               
            
             
               The
               Way
               and
               Method
               ,
               how
               to
               form
               and
               order
               Battalions
               of
               Foot.
               
            
             
               THIS
               Excellent
               Art
               of
               forming
               the
               Foot
               ,
               instructs
               how
               to
               draw
               up
               a
               Body
               of
               them
               in
               such
               excellent
               order
               ,
               and
               with
               so
               much
               precaution
               beforehand
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               be
               able
               to
               withstand
               〈…〉
               another
               Body
               of
               Infantry
               ,
               though
               of
               a
               〈◊〉
               greater
               number
               ;
               or
               a
               Body
               of
               Cavalry
               alone
               ;
               or
               else
               a
               Body
               compos'd
               both
               of
               Cavalry
               and
               Infantry
               ,
               when
               attacked
               in
               a
               Plain
               ,
               Down
               ,
               or
               in
               an
               open
               Field
               ,
               where
               there
               are
               neither
               Defiles
               as
               Hedges
               nor
               Ditches
               ,
               nor
               any
               rising
               Grounds
               to
               defend
               them
               from
               the
               Enemy
               .
               Now
               the
               Pike
               and
               Partisan
               ,
               being
               the
               only
               Arms
               proper
               to
               stop
               〈◊〉
               fury
               of
               the
               Cavalry
               ,
               and
               to
               prevent
               their
               breaking
               in
               upon
               the
               Battalion
               ,
               the
               first
               thing
               that
               is
               to
               be
               done
               in
               drawing
               up
               this
               Battalion
               ,
               must
               be
               to
               form
               a
               Body
               of
               all
               Pikes
               ,
               and
               it
               must
               be
               the
               chief
               care
               of
               the
               Officer
               that
               commands
               the
               Party
               ,
               to
               dispose
               his
               Men
               in
               such
               a
               form
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               be
               able
               not
               only
               to
               defend
               the
               Musqueteers
               ,
               but
               the
               Colours
               also
               ,
               and
               the
               Baggage
               ,
               if
               there
               should
               be
               occasion
               .
            
             
               
                 Plate
                 I
              
            
             
             
               1.
               
               The
               Men
               must
               be
               so
               ordered
               ,
               as
               to
               stand
               with
               their
               Arms
               presented
               every
               way
               ,
               and
               to
               make
               a
               Front
               on
               every
               side
               ,
               to
               the
               end
               ,
               that
               whatever
               of
               their
               Fronts
               be
               assailed
               ,
               or
               attacked
               ,
               they
               may
               be
               able
               to
               defend
               themselves
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               Soldiers
               must
               be
               so
               ordered
               ,
               that
               the
               Angles
               of
               the
               Battalion
               may
               be
               very
               obtuse
               ;
               in
               such
               a
               manner
               ,
               that
               the
               two
               sides
               that
               form
               the
               Angle
               ,
               joyn
               together
               ,
               but
               with
               one
               right
               Line
               only
               .
               For
               the
               Angle
               is
               the
               weakest
               part
               of
               the
               Battalion
               ,
               as
               being
               least
               strengthened
               by
               the
               Pikes
               .
               For
               the
               Soldiers
               which
               are
               next
               the
               Angle
               ,
               present
               their
               Pikes
               in
               Front
               ,
               and
               not
               being
               able
               therefore
               to
               present
               ,
               lie
               open
               to
               the
               Enemy
               .
               So
               that
               our
               Fore-Fathers
               ,
               with
               whom
               squ
               〈…〉
               Battalions
               were
               in
               great
               use
               ,
               flanked
               their
               Angles
               with
               little
               Bodies
               of
               Musqueteers
               marked
               ABCD
               ,
               which
               are
               small
               Bodies
               posted
               in
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               Fronts
               of
               the
               Battalion
               ,
               and
               with
               which
               sometimes
               they
               secur'd
               the
               Angles
               .
               True
               it
               is
               ,
               that
               these
               little
               Bodies
               being
               easily
               cut
               off
               by
               the
               Horse
               ,
               and
               beaten
               off
               from
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Battalion
               ,
               the
               farther
               use
               of
               them
               has
               been
               laid
               aside
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               You
               ought
               to
               leave
               void
               a
               space
               of
               Ground
               in
               the
               Center
               of
               the
               Battalion
               ,
               or
               middle
               of
               the
               Pikes
               ,
               sufficient
               to
               receive
               and
               secure
               the
               Musqueteers
               ,
               the
               Colours
               ,
               and
               Baggage
               .
            
             
               
               
                 The
                 manner
                 of
                 ordering
                 any
                 number
                 of
                 Soldiers
                 into
                 any
                 Square
                 Form
                 of
                 Battel
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 These
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 considered
                 either
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 the
                 Form
                 of
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 or
                 of
                 the
                 Number
                 of
                 the
                 Men.
                 
              
               
                 A
                 Square
                 Battel
                 of
                 Ground
                 is
                 that
                 which
                 hath
                 the
                 Rank
                 as
                 long
                 as
                 the
                 File
                 ,
                 notwithstanding
                 the
                 Men
                 in
                 Rank
                 be
                 more
                 than
                 in
                 File
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 Square
                 Battle
                 of
                 Men
                 ,
                 is
                 that
                 which
                 hath
                 an
                 equal
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 both
                 in
                 Rank
                 and
                 File
                 ,
                 though
                 the
                 Ground
                 on
                 which
                 they
                 stand
                 be
                 longer
                 on
                 the
                 File
                 than
                 on
                 the
                 Rank
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 In
                 respect
                 of
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 the
                 Men
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 called
                 either
                 a
                 
                   Square
                   Battel
                
                 or
                 a
                 
                   Double
                   Battel
                
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 Battel
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Grand
                   Front
                
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 Quadruple
                 ,
                 or
                 a
                 Battel
                 of
                 any
                 proportion
                 of
                 the
                 number
                 in
                 Rank
                 to
                 the
                 number
                 in
                 File
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 So
                 that
                 if
                 you
                 are
                 to
                 form
                 a
                 Square
                 Battle
                 of
                 Men
                 ,
                 extract
                 the
                 Square
                 Root
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 same
                 shall
                 be
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Soldiers
                 to
                 beset
                 in
                 a
                 Rank
                 .
                 As
                 for
                 Example
                 ,
                 570
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 formed
                 into
                 a
                 Square
                 Battel
                 ,
                 that
                 there
                 may
                 be
                 as
                 many
                 in
                 Rank
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 File
                 .
                 Take
                 the
                 Square
                 Root
                 of
                 576
                 ;
                 which
                 〈◊〉
                 ●4
                 ,
                 the
                 Number
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 in
                 Rank
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 in
                 a
                 File
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 To
                 order
                 any
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 into
                 a
                 Battel
                 of
                 the
                 Grand
                 Front.
                 
              
               
                 SUppose
                 16900
                 Soldiers
                 were
                 to
                 be
                 Marshalled
                 into
                 a
                 Battel
                 of
                 the
                 Grand
                 Front.
                 First
                 divide
                 16900
                 by
                 4
                 ,
                 which
                 gives
                 me
                 〈…〉
                 out
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 extract
                 the
                 Square
                 Root
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 65
                 ,
                 the
                 Quadruple
                 whereof
                 is
                 260
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 I
                 have
                 6
                 for
                 a
                 File
                 ,
                 and
                 260
                 in
                 Rank
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Any
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 ,
                 with
                 their
                 distance
                 in
                 Rank
                 and
                 File
                 ,
                 how
                 to
                 order
                 them
                 into
                 a
                 Square
                 Battel
                 of
                 Ground
                 .
              
               
                 SUppose
                 2500
                 Soldiers
                 ,
                 were
                 to
                 be
                 〈…〉
                 Square
                 Battle
                 of
                 Ground
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 their
                 distance
                 in
                 File
                 should
                 be
                 7
                 Feet
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 Rank
                 3
                 Feet
                 ;
                 How
                 many
                 Men
                 must
                 be
                 placed
                 in
                 Rank
                 and
                 in
                 File
                 .
              
               
                 Say
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 Rule
                 of
                 Three
                 ,
                 as
                 7
                 to
                 3
                 ,
                 〈◊〉
                 2500●
                 to
                 ●●71
                 ,
                 the
                 Square
                 Root
                 whereof
                 is
                 32
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 in
                 a
                 File
                 ,
                 and
                 3
                 over
                 .
                 How
                 to
                 find
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 that
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 in
                 Rank
                 ,
                 divide
                 2500
                 by
                 32
                 ,
                 the
                 Quotient
                 is
                 78
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 Men
                 to
                 be
                 placed
                 in
                 a
                 Rank
                 ,
                 and
                 4
                 over
                 .
              
            
             
               
               
                 The
                 manner
                 how
                 to
                 order
                 the
                 Square
                 in
                 time
                 of
                 Battel
                 .
              
               
                 THE
                 Square
                 being
                 formed
                 as
                 aforesaid
                 ,
                 the
                 Officers
                 are
                 to
                 take
                 care
                 ,
                 that
                 every
                 Front
                 of
                 Soldiers
                 do
                 their
                 Duty
                 ;
                 and
                 the
                 Captains
                 that
                 are
                 in
                 the
                 Center
                 of
                 each
                 Front
                 ,
                 are
                 to
                 retire
                 into
                 the
                 first
                 Rank
                 ,
                 when
                 the
                 Musqueteers
                 make
                 ready
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 to
                 kneel
                 when
                 the
                 Soldiers
                 kneel
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 perform
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 their
                 Pikes
                 as
                 the
                 Pikemen
                 do
                 :
                 Then
                 Command
                 ;
                 
                   Granadiers
                   take
                   your
                   Posts
                   in
                   the
                   Angles
                   .
                
              
               
                 Here
                 your
                 Granadiers
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 divided
                 in
                 4
                 equal
                 parts
                 ,
                 and
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 placed
                 without
                 at
                 the
                 4
                 Angles
                 ;
                 but
                 if
                 there
                 be
                 not
                 room
                 enough
                 ,
                 you
                 may
                 place
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 within
                 the
                 Angles
                 with
                 their
                 Daggers
                 in
                 their
                 Firelocks
                 :
                 Those
                 without
                 the
                 Angles
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 3
                 deep
                 .
                 The
                 2
                 last
                 Ranks
                 of
                 which
                 are
                 to
                 fire
                 with
                 the
                 Musqueteers
                 .
                 And
                 the
                 Front
                 Rank
                 are
                 to
                 make
                 ready
                 their
                 Granadoes
                 .
                 And
                 as
                 soon
                 as
                 the
                 two
                 last
                 Ranks
                 have
                 fired
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 to
                 put
                 their
                 Daggers
                 into
                 their
                 Firelocks
                 ,
                 and
                 stand
                 Charged
                 ;
                 and
                 when
                 the
                 first
                 Rank
                 of
                 Musqueteers
                 present
                 ,
                 the
                 first
                 Rank
                 of
                 Granadiers
                 are
                 to
                 deliver
                 their
                 Granado's
                 ;
                 which
                 done
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 to
                 unsling
                 their
                 Firelocks
                 ,
                 and
                 put
                 in
                 their
                 Daggers
                 ,
                 and
                 stand
                 Charged
                 as
                 the
                 rest
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Face
                   Square
                
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 Musqueteers
                 on
                 the
                 Right
                 and
                 Left
                 are
                 to
                 face
                 outwards
                 ,
                 and
                 those
                 to
                 the
                 Rear
                 ,
                 to
                 face
                 to
                 the
                 right
                 about
                 .
                 The
                 3
                 outwardmost
                 Files
                 of
                 Pikes
                 on
                 the
                 right
                 and
                 left
                 ,
                 are
                 to
                 face
                 outwards
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Rear
                 half
                 Files
                 of
                 the
                 
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Pikes
                 are
                 to
                 face
                 to
                 the
                 Right
                 about
                 .
                 Those
                 in
                 the
                 Angles
                 are
                 to
                 face
                 to
                 the
                 points
                 of
                 the
                 Angles
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Musqueteers
                   make
                   ready
                
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 Pikes
                 are
                 to
                 Port
                 very
                 low
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 continue
                 so
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 to
                 Charge
                 when
                 the
                 Musqueteers
                 Present
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 
                   First
                   Rank
                   Kneel
                
                 .
                 Which
                 they
                 must
                 do
                 ,
                 holding
                 their
                 Musquets
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 the
                 two
                 last
                 Ranks
                 may
                 fire
                 over
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 
                   The
                   two
                   last
                   Ranks
                   Present
                   .
                   Fire
                   .
                
                 As
                 soon
                 as
                 ever
                 the
                 second
                 and
                 third
                 Rank
                 have
                 Fired
                 and
                 Recovered
                 their
                 Arms
                 ;
                 the
                 first
                 Rank
                 is
                 to
                 stand
                 up
                 without
                 any
                 other
                 Word
                 of
                 Command
                 ,
                 with
                 their
                 Musquets
                 Cocked
                 and
                 Guarded
                 ,
                 ready
                 to
                 Present
                 .
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 
                   Recover
                   your
                   Arms.
                
                 Here
                 the
                 first
                 Rank
                 stands
                 up
                 with
                 their
                 Musquets
                 recovered
                 strait
                 before
                 them
                 ,
                 ready
                 Cocked
                 and
                 Guarded
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 two
                 Ranks
                 that
                 have
                 fired
                 load
                 .
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 Front
                 Rank
                 Present
                 .
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 Fire
                 .
              
               
                 
                   Recover
                   your
                   Arms.
                
                 At
                 which
                 Word
                 of
                 Command
                 ,
                 the
                 Pikemen
                 are
                 to
                 recover
                 their
                 Pikes
                 from
                 their
                 Port.
                 
                   To
                   your
                   Leader
                   ,
                   March
                   ,
                   Halt
                   ,
                   Face
                   ,
                   Square
                   ,
                
                 &c.
                 
              
               
                 According
                 to
                 this
                 Method
                 ,
                 they
                 may
                 be
                 made
                 to
                 March
                 and
                 to
                 Fire
                 to
                 every
                 Front.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
             
               PLATE
               II.
               
            
             
               The
               General
               Rule
               for
               the
               blunting
               or
               filling
               up
               the
               Angles
               of
               the
               Battalion
               .
            
             
               EVERY
               Body
               ,
               whether
               lesser
               or
               greater
               ,
               that
               requires
               the
               blunting
               of
               its
               Angles
               ,
               ought
               to
               be
               compos'd
               of
               a
               Square
               number
               of
               Men
               ,
               as
               of
               4
               ,
               9
               ,
               16
               ,
               25
               ,
               36
               ,
               49
               ,
               &c.
               
               Therefore
               you
               must
               place
               the
               Men
               in
               Rank
               according
               to
               the
               Arithmetical
               Progression
               ,
               or
               Proportion
               ,
               of
               which
               the
               Interval
               ,
               Excess
               ,
               or
               Difference
               of
               the
               Terms
               must
               always
               be
               two
               :
               Thus
               ,
               having
               placed
               the
               first
               Man
               at
               the
               Angular
               Point
               A
               of
               the
               Figure
               1.
               the
               second
               Rank
               shall
               be
               of
               three
               Men
               ,
               as
               being
               a
               number
               of
               which
               ,
               the
               Excess
               ,
               Interval
               ,
               and
               Difference
               is
               Two
               in
               respect
               of
               one
               .
               The
               third
               Rank
               shall
               be
               of
               five
               Men
               ▪
               which
               is
               a
               number
               that
               exceeds
               three
               by
               two
               .
               The
               fourth
               shall
               be
               of
               seven
               ;
               the
               fifth
               of
               nine
               ,
               and
               so
               forward
               ,
               still
               encreasing
               every
               Rank
               by
               two
               Men
               ,
               more
               than
               the
               Rank
               which
               is
               before
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               same
               Arithmetical
               Progression
               ,
               which
               has
               always
               two
               for
               the
               Interval
               ,
               and
               difference
               of
               the
               Terms
               .
            
             
               Now
               to
               place
               these
               Men
               in
               due
               Order
               ,
               you
               must
               imagine
               that
               the
               Square
               little
               Body
               ACBD
               ;
               moves
               off
               the
               Ground
               T
               ,
               upon
               the
               left
               of
               the
               
               
                 
                   Plate
                   II
                
                 
                   Fig
                   1
                
              
               
               
               Battalion
               Q
               ;
               and
               when
               its
               last
               Rank
               AD
               ,
               is
               advanced
               one
               Pace
               beyond
               the
               Wing
               AD
               of
               the
               same
               Battalion
               Q
               ,
               it
               turns
               to
               the
               right
               ,
               and
               then
               the
               Soldier
               A
               of
               the
               Second
               Figure
               comes
               upon
               the
               Ground
               A
               of
               the
               first
               Figure
               .
               The
               sides
               AD
               ,
               AC
               ,
               of
               the
               small
               Body
               meet
               together
               upon
               the
               sides
               that
               answer
               one
               another
               ,
               AD
               ,
               AC
               of
               the
               Angle
               .
               Then
               you
               Command
               the
               Men
               of
               the
               little
               Battalion
               to
               make
               a
               Front
               toward
               the
               Angle
               ,
               and
               when
               they
               are
               drawn
               up
               according
               to
               this
               Arithmetical
               Progression
               ,
               you
               cause
               them
               to
               make
               an
               outward
               Front.
               
            
          
           
             
             
               PLATE
               III.
               
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               framing
               an
               Octogon
               Battalion
               with
               Eight
               Fronts
               .
            
             
               SUPPOSE
               it
               a
               Battalion
               of
               40
               Pikemen
               ,
               drawn
               up
               four
               deep
               ,
               and
               10
               in
               Front.
               You
               may
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               same
               Method
               ,
               draw
               up
               like
               an
               Octogon
               ,
               any
               number
               of
               Pikemen
               that
               shall
               observe
               the
               same
               Proportion
               of
               4
               to
               10
               ,
               between
               Front
               and
               Depth
               ,
               as
               8
               in
               Depth
               ,
               and
               20
               in
               Front
               ,
               16
               in
               Depth
               ,
               and
               40
               in
               Front
               ,
               or
               32
               in
               Depth
               ,
               and
               80
               in
               Front.
               For
               in
               this
               Example
               I
               have
               chosen
               this
               little
               number
               of
               Pikemen
               ,
               to
               give
               the
               more
               light
               to
               the
               ordering
               and
               disposing
               of
               a
               far
               greater
               number
               .
            
             
               
                 The
                 Words
                 of
                 Command
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 two
                 right
                 hand
                 Files
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 two
                 left
                 hand
                 Files
                 stand
                 fast
                 .
                 
                   AB
                   ,
                   IL.
                
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 half
                 File
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 right
                 hand
                 Files
                 ,
                 face
                 to
                 the
                 right
                 ,
                 B.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 half
                 File
                 of
                 the
                 two
                 left
                 hand
                 Files
                 ,
                 face
                 to
                 the
                 left
                 L.
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Files
                 of
                 the
                 Wings
                 ,
                 March.
                 
              
               
                 
                   Plate
                   III
                
                 
                   Fig
                   III
                
                 
                   Fig
                   I
                
                 
                   Fig
                   IV
                
                 
                   Fig
                   II
                
              
               
               
                 There
                 remains
                 afterwards
                 upon
                 the
                 ground
                 of
                 the
                 Battalion
                 ,
                 the
                 six
                 Files
                 CD
                 ,
                 GH
                 ,
                 which
                 must
                 be
                 opened
                 by
                 half
                 Ranks
                 ,
                 and
                 half
                 Files
                 ,
                 to
                 form
                 the
                 Cross
                 of
                 the
                 third
                 Figure
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 clear
                 the
                 ground
                 of
                 the
                 Center
                 ,
                 by
                 a
                 quarter
                 Wheeling
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 The
                 half
                 File
                 of
                 the
                 right
                 hand
                 half
                 Rank
                 C
                 ,
                 half
                 turn
                 to
                 the
                 Right
                 .
                 Order
                 your
                 Pikes
                 .
              
               
                 C
                 makes
                 a
                 Front
                 towards
                 the
                 Rear
                 ,
                 and
                 keeps
                 his
                 ground
                 .
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 File-leader
                 of
                 the
                 right
                 hand
                 half
                 Rank
                 to
                 the
                 right
                 ,
                 G.
                 March.
                 Stand.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 three
                 Files
                 G
                 ,
                 make
                 a
                 Front
                 toward
                 A
                 ,
                 upon
                 the
                 right
                 Wing
                 ,
                 and
                 advance
                 on
                 that
                 side
                 ,
                 two
                 or
                 three
                 Paces
                 beyond
                 their
                 Ground
                 ;
                 and
                 so
                 thar
                 which
                 was
                 a
                 File
                 is
                 become
                 a
                 Rank
                 .
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 They
                 that
                 marched
                 stand
                 fast
                 ;
                 G
                 to
                 the
                 Right
                 ,
                 a
                 Quarter
                 Wheeling
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 three
                 Files
                 G
                 ,
                 make
                 a
                 quarter
                 turn
                 to
                 the
                 right
                 ,
                 and
                 wheel
                 about
                 the
                 Soldier
                 R
                 ,
                 in
                 like
                 manner
                 as
                 the
                 right
                 Wing
                 TY
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 ,
                 and
                 became
                 placed
                 ,
                 as
                 you
                 see
                 the
                 2d
                 Figure
                 ;
                 where
                 the
                 three
                 Files
                 G
                 ,
                 are
                 marked
                 with
                 the
                 same
                 Letters
                 as
                 they
                 are
                 in
                 the
                 Body
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Figure
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 because
                 ▪
                 that
                 after
                 the
                 Wheeling
                 ,
                 they
                 make
                 a
                 Front
                 toward
                 VR
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 they
                 may
                 make
                 the
                 Front
                 outward
                 on
                 the
                 side
                 of
                 VXY
                 .
                 (
                 The
                 next
                 Word
                 of
                 Command
                 is
                 :
                 )
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 To
                 the
                 left
                 .
                 —
                 Order
                 your
                 Pikes
                 .
              
               
                 9.
                 
                 File-leader
                 of
                 the
                 left
                 hand
                 half
                 Rank
                 ,
                 stand
                 upon
                 your
                 Guard
                 ,
                 H.
                 March.
                 
              
               
                 Take
                 notice
                 in
                 the
                 2d
                 Figure
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 Files
                 H
                 ,
                 marked
                 with
                 little
                 Points
                 .
                 These
                 you
                 cause
                 to
                 march
                 forward
                 along
                 the
                 Line
                 marked
                 PM
                 ,
                 QF
                 ,
                 to
                 gain
                 the
                 ground
                 H
                 ,
                 marked
                 with
                 three
                 
                 great
                 Dots
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 Figure
                 .
                 But
                 to
                 gain
                 this
                 ground
                 ,
                 they
                 march
                 beyond
                 the
                 ground
                 of
                 the
                 Battalion
                 ,
                 till
                 the
                 second
                 Rank
                 pointed
                 PN
                 ,
                 have
                 advanced
                 three
                 Paces
                 farther
                 than
                 the
                 Flank
                 YT
                 ,
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 Files
                 G
                 ,
                 which
                 then
                 make
                 a
                 Wheeling
                 ,
                 which
                 will
                 happen
                 when
                 the
                 Soldier
                 P
                 ,
                 shall
                 be
                 upon
                 the
                 ground
                 Q
                 ,
                 and
                 that
                 the
                 Soldier
                 M
                 ,
                 shall
                 come
                 upon
                 the
                 ground
                 F
                 ,
                 at
                 what
                 time
                 the
                 Word
                 of
                 Command
                 .
              
               
                 10.
                 
                 To
                 the
                 Right
                 .
                 —
                 March.
                 
              
               
                 To
                 make
                 a
                 Front
                 toward
                 the
                 three
                 Files
                 G
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 they
                 shall
                 come
                 to
                 be
                 three
                 Paces
                 from
                 the
                 Rear
                 of
                 the
                 three
                 Files
                 G
                 ,
                 then
                 Command
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 11.
                 
                 To
                 the
                 Left.
                 Rest
                 your
                 Pikes
                 .
              
               
                 Then
                 they
                 will
                 make
                 a
                 Front
                 outward
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 shall
                 keep
                 their
                 ground
                 .
              
               
                 12.
                 
                 The
                 half
                 File
                 of
                 the
                 left
                 hand
                 half
                 Rank
                 ,
                 stand
                 fast
                 ,
                 D.
                 March.
                 Stand.
                 
              
               
                 The
                 half
                 File
                 D
                 ,
                 advances
                 two
                 Paces
                 beyond
                 its
                 ground
                 .
              
               
                 13.
                 
                 To
                 the
                 Right
                 .
                 —
                 A
                 Quarter
                 Wheeling
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 half
                 File
                 D
                 ,
                 makes
                 a
                 quarter
                 Wheel
                 about
                 the
                 Soldier
                 Z
                 ,
                 and
                 because
                 that
                 after
                 the
                 Wheeling
                 ,
                 they
                 make
                 a
                 Front
                 inward
                 toward
                 the
                 Center
                 ,
                 therefore
                 to
                 change
                 the
                 Front
                 outward
                 ,
                 the
                 Word
                 of
                 Command
                 is
                 :
              
               
                 14.
                 
                 They
                 that
                 made
                 the
                 Quarter
                 Wheeling
                 ,
                 wheel
                 by
                 half
                 Conversion
                 to
                 the
                 Right
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 Cross
                 being
                 thus
                 made
                 ,
                 you
                 bring
                 the
                 four
                 Files
                 upon
                 the
                 Ground
                 ,
                 4
                 ,
                 5
                 ,
                 7
                 ,
                 8
                 ,
                 and
                 blunt
                 the
                 Angles
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 foregoing
                 General
                 Rule
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
             
               PLATE
               IV.
               
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               drawing
               up
               a
               Battalion
               in
               a
               Hexagonal
               Figure
               ,
               with
               a
               void
               Space
               in
               the
               Center
               ,
               and
               the
               Front
               of
               the
               Battalion
               five
               times
               exceeding
               the
               Depth
               .
            
             
               WE
               suppose
               the
               Battalion
               to
               consist
               of
               720
               Pikemen
               ,
               12
               Deep
               ,
               and
               60
               in
               Front
               ,
               which
               is
               to
               be
               drawn
               up
               into
               an
               Octogonal
               Figure
               like
               that
               marked
               ♂
               .
            
             
               The
               Battalion
               being
               drawn
               up
               in
               the
               large
               black
               Draught
               of
               the
               first
               figure
               ,
               to
               bring
               it
               to
               the
               Square
               marked
               with
               Points
               in
               thē
               same
               figure
               ,
               the
               following
               Words
               of
               Command
               are
               to
               be
               made
               use
               of
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               twelve
               Files
               of
               the
               Right
               wing
               ,
               of
               the
               twelve
               Files
               of
               the
               left
               wing
               ,
               stand
               fast
               ,
               C.
               D.
               Q.
               P.
               A.
               B.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               six
               Right-hand
               files
               of
               the
               Right-wing
               ,
               and
               the
               six
               left
               hand
               files
               of
               the
               Left-wing
               ,
               C.
               D.
               A.
               B.
               
            
             
               3.
               
               They
               that
               have
               advanced
               double
               their
               Files
               inward
               to
               the
               Front
               and
               Reer
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Takes
               the
               Ground
               V.
               B.
               takes
               the
               Ground
               T.
               G.
               takes
               the
               ▪
               Ground
               G
               O
               ,
               and
               D.
               possesses
               R.
               
            
             
             
               4.
               
               They
               that
               had
               the
               word
               of
               Command
               ,
               and
               they
               that
               have
               doubled
               ,
               stand
               fast
               ,
               VPT
               ,
               OQR
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               Middle
               files
               stand
               fast
               ME.
               
            
             
               6.
               
               Advance
               you
               Pikes
               ,
               Middle
               files
               EM
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               The
               half
               file
               of
               those
               that
               advanced
               their
               Pikes
               ,
               wheel
               by
               half
               Conversion
               to
               the
               Right
               M.
               
            
             
               8.
               
               March
               those
               that
               advanced
               their
               Pikes
               ,
               till
               the
               first
               Rank
               be
               advanced
               one
               Pace
               further
               than
               the
               first
               of
               the
               files
               that
               doubled
               Front
               and
               Reer
               .
            
             
               M
               and
               E
               move
               and
               change
               into
               the
               Ground
               marked
               with
               the
               points
               M
               and
               E
               ,
               and
               from
               the
               square
               represented
               by
               the
               same
               points
               ,
               which
               is
               afterwards
               to
               be
               considered
               in
               the
               figure
               K.
               
            
             
               9.
               
               The
               six
               right-hand
               Files
               and
               the
               six
               left-hand
               Files
               that
               marched
               wheel
               ,
               by
               half
               Conversion
               ,
               into
               IF
               ,
               HH
               ,
               which
               done
               ,
               Face
               towards
               the
               Center
               of
               the
               Battalion
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               They
               that
               have
               wheeled
               by
               half
               Conversion
               to
               the
               Right
               ,
               march
               toward
               the
               Center
               till
               the
               last
               Rank
               be
               all
               entred
               .
            
             
               I
               and
               F
               come
               upon
               the
               Ground
               Y
               ,
               and
               HH
               upon
               the
               Ground
               GG
               where
               as
               they
               stand
               ,
               they
               are
               caused
               to
               turn
               to
               the
               Right
               and
               Left
               ,
               to
               advance
               forward
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               Y
               fronting
               Y.
               and
               G.
               fronting
               G
               ,
               by
               which
               means
               YY
               .
               GG
               .
               possess
               the
               Ground
               of
               NNNN
               .
            
             
               The
               Ground
               IY
               .
               and
               FY
               becomes
               void
               .
            
             
               Then
               the
               word
               of
               Command
               is
               to
               be
               given
               to
               the
               two
               particular
               Battalions
               ,
               OQR
               ,
               VPT
               ,
               which
               in
               regard
               they
               make
               a
               front
               inward
               ,
               you
               must
               order
               the
               Battalion
               OQR
               ,
               to
               make
               a
               half
               wheel
               to
               the
               Right
               ,
               and
               the
               Battalion
               VPT
               ,
               to
               make
               a
               half
               wheeling
               to
               the
               left
               ,
               and
               by
               that
               means
               they
               will
               make
               a
               front
               inwards
               ,
               and
               
               you
               shall
               cause
               them
               to
               march
               to
               the
               Center
               ,
               and
               the
               O
               and
               V
               shall
               possess
               the
               ground
               Y
               ,
               Y
               ,
               and
               R
               and
               T
               shall
               possess
               the
               ground
               GG
               .
            
             
               Then
               you
               must
               cut
               off
               eight
               fourths
               of
               the
               Ranks
               ORVTLLLL
               ,
               and
               reduce
               them
               into
               Triangles
               ,
               to
               blunt
               the
               four
               Angles
               that
               are
               next
               them
               ,
               and
               the
               Battalion
               shall
               be
               formed
               after
               an
               Octogonal
               figure
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               figure
               marked
               ♂
               ,
               where
               you
               see
               the
               same
               letter
               made
               use
               of
               here
               ,
               they
               answer
               to
               the
               same
               letters
               in
               the
               two
               other
               figures
               .
            
             
               You
               have
               532
               Musquetiers
               at
               12
               in
               depth
               ,
               and
               44
               in
               front
               ,
               there
               will
               remain
               4.
               
               The
               532
               Musquetiers
               shall
               serve
               for
               the
               Flanks
               of
               the
               Battalion
               of
               Pikes
               ,
               and
               to
               that
               purpose
               you
               shall
               take
               12
               files
               of
               the
               right
               Wing
               ,
               which
               will
               make
               144
               Musquetiers
               ,
               and
               as
               they
               will
               be
               equal
               in
               front
               to
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Pikes
               marked
               E
               ,
               you
               shall
               march
               them
               to
               the
               head
               of
               the
               said
               Body
               ,
               and
               cause
               them
               to
               enter
               into
               the
               Center
               through
               the
               Intervals
               of
               the
               Pikes
               .
            
             
               When
               they
               are
               advanced
               towards
               the
               Center
               ,
               divide
               the
               Ranks
               into
               half
               ,
               so
               that
               one
               half
               Rank
               shall
               march
               towards
               the
               Body
               of
               Pikes
               marked
               Q
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               half
               Ranks
               towards
               the
               Body
               of
               Pikes
               marked
               P.
               
            
             
               After
               this
               take
               from
               the
               left
               Wing
               of
               the
               Musquetiers
               12
               files
               more
               ,
               which
               make
               144
               men
               ;
               and
               cause
               them
               to
               advance
               towards
               the
               Center
               through
               the
               Intervals
               of
               the
               Pikes
               E
               ,
               and
               then
               divide
               them
               by
               half
               files
               .
            
             
               One
               half
               File
               shall
               advance
               toward
               M
               ,
               and
               the
               other
               half
               File
               shall
               stand
               their
               ground
               behind
               the
               Pikes
               E.
               
            
             
             
               For
               the
               304
               Musquetiers
               that
               remain
               ,
               they
               shall
               make
               the
               two
               Files
               that
               surround
               the
               whole
               Body
               .
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               V.
               
            
             
               The
               way
               and
               manner
               of
               reducing
               a
               Battalion
               with
               a
               void
               space
               in
               the
               Center
               .
            
             
               YOU
               begin
               with
               the
               Musquetiers
               which
               you
               command
               from
               the
               Center
               through
               the
               several
               fronts
               MPEQ
               ,
               which
               together
               with
               those
               that
               surrounded
               the
               Body
               ,
               you
               cause
               to
               rank
               and
               file
               themselves
               as
               they
               were
               .
            
             
               As
               for
               the
               Pikes
               that
               form
               the
               Octogonal
               Body
               ,
               you
               give
               them
               the
               following
               words
               of
               Command
               :
            
             
               1.
               
               They
               that
               stand
               in
               the
               Angles
               to
               your
               Places
               ,
               O
               ,
               and
               R.
               resume
               their
               distances
               ,
               and
               make
               the
               same
               front
               at
               Q.
               The
               files
               V
               and
               I
               do
               the
               same
               in
               respect
               of
               P
               ,
               and
               the
               files
               LL
               observe
               the
               same
               order
               ;
               in
               regard
               of
               the
               Pikes
               ME.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               twelve
               files
               of
               the
               right
               wing
               ,
               and
               the
               twelve
               files
               of
               the
               left
               wing
               ,
               that
               doubled
               Front
               and
               Reer
               ,
               stand
               fast
               OQR
               ,
               VPT
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               March
               files
               of
               the
               wings
               that
               have
               received
               the
               word
               of
               command
               ;
               OQR
               and
               VPT
               ,
               move
               off
               and
               march
               forward
               .
            
             
               
                 Plate
                 IV
                 :
              
               
                 Fig
                 1.
                 
              
            
             
             
               5.
               
               The
               Files
               that
               marched
               toward
               the
               Center
               ,
               to
               their
               places
               ;
               the
               four
               small
               Squares
               NNNN
               ,
               return
               to
               the
               Front
               of
               M.
               and
               E.
               
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               middle
               Files
               stand
               upon
               your
               Guard
               
                 E.
                 M.
              
               
            
             
               7.
               
               The
               half
               File
               ,
               of
               the
               middle
               Files
               ,
               half
               a
               Turn
               to
               the
               Right
               ,
               M
               makes
               a
               Front
               towards
               the
               same
               Center
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               File-Leader
               of
               the
               middle
               Files
               ,
               half
               a
               Turn
               to
               the
               Right
               ,
               E
               makes
               a
               Front
               towards
               the
               same
               Center
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               March
               middle
               Files
               E
               and
               M
               ,
               move
               forward
               till
               they
               come
               upon
               the
               Front
               CDQ
               ,
               and
               PAB
               of
               the
               first
               Figure
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               File-Leader
               of
               those
               that
               marched
               ,
               half
               a
               Turn
               to
               the
               Right
               ,
               E
               returns
               to
               its
               first
               Front
               ,
               and
               the
               Battalion
               is
               reduced
               .
            
             
               
                 Directions
                 for
                 Firing
                 .
              
               
                 1.
                 
                 In
                 keeping
                 of
                 Ground
                 :
                 This
                 way
                 of
                 Firing
                 may
                 be
                 performed
                 either
                 by
                 two
                 Ranks
                 at
                 a
                 time
                 ,
                 or
                 three
                 Ranks
                 ;
                 The
                 first
                 Kneeling
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 second
                 Stooping
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 two
                 first
                 Stooping
                 ;
                 or
                 else
                 thus
                 ,
                 
                   Musketeers
                   make
                   ready
                   all
                
                 ,
                 at
                 which
                 time
                 the
                 Musketeers
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 Cocked
                 and
                 Guarded
                 ▪
                 and
                 their
                 Arms
                 strait
                 before
                 them
                 ,
                 the
                 Pikes
                 Ported
                 ,
                 and
                 when
                 the
                 Musketeers
                 Present
                 ,
                 the
                 Pikes
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 charged
                 .
                 Then
              
               
                 The
                 five
                 first
                 Ranks
                 Kneel
                 ,
                 The
                 Reer
                 Rank
                 Present
                 ,
                 Fire
                 ;
                 Fifth
                 Rank
                 stand
                 up
                 ,
                 Present
                 ,
                 Fire
                 ;
                 Fourth
                 Rank
                 Stand
                 up
                 ,
                 Present
                 ,
                 Fire
                 .
                 
                   And
                   so
                   of
                   the
                   rest
                
                 .
              
               
                 And
                 as
                 they
                 have
                 fired
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 to
                 charge
                 again
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 be
                 in
                 a
                 readiness
                 against
                 the
                 next
                 Word
                 of
                 Command
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 For
                 Fire
                 gaining
                 Ground
                 ,
                 the
                 Command
                 
                 is
                 ,
                 
                   First
                   Rank
                   and
                   Musketeers
                   make
                   ready
                   ,
                   Halt
                   :
                
                 Then
                 Present
                 and
                 Fire
                 .
                 Here
                 they
                 are
                 to
                 recover
                 their
                 Arms
                 without
                 any
                 command
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 file
                 off
                 to
                 the
                 Right
                 and
                 Left
                 into
                 the
                 Reer
                 .
                 When
                 the
                 first
                 Rank
                 presents
                 ,
                 the
                 next
                 Rank
                 is
                 to
                 make
                 ready
                 without
                 any
                 Command
                 ,
                 and
                 as
                 the
                 first
                 Rank
                 files
                 off
                 ,
                 the
                 next
                 make
                 good
                 the
                 Front
                 ,
                 and
                 so
                 the
                 Battalion
                 is
                 to
                 March
                 again
                 ,
                 and
                 every
                 Rank
                 to
                 Fire
                 in
                 this
                 order
                 ;
                 And
                 when
                 every
                 Rank
                 presents
                 ,
                 the
                 Pikes
                 are
                 to
                 charge
                 without
                 any
                 command
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Of
                 Firing
                 to
                 the
                 Front
                 retreating
                 .
                 The
                 best
                 way
                 is
                 to
                 Fire
                 by
                 single
                 Ranks
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 method
                 as
                 in
                 gaining
                 Ground
                 ,
                 only
                 after
                 every
                 Rank
                 has
                 fired
                 and
                 filed
                 off
                 to
                 the
                 Right
                 and
                 Left
                 into
                 the
                 Rear
                 ,
                 instead
                 of
                 the
                 next
                 Rank
                 advancing
                 to
                 make
                 good
                 the
                 Front
                 of
                 Pikes
                 ,
                 the
                 Pikes
                 are
                 to
                 retreat
                 to
                 the
                 Musketeers
                 ,
                 who
                 stand
                 still
                 till
                 the
                 Pikes
                 make
                 an
                 even
                 Front
                 with
                 them
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               VI.
               
            
             
               The
               best
               Way
               and
               Method
               of
               Marching
               an
               Army
               in
               a
               Flat
               and
               Plain
               Country
               .
            
             
               
                 Plate
                 V.
                 
              
               
                 A
                 Regiment
                 of
                 12
                 Companies
                 Encamped
              
               
                 Officer
                 in
                 Cheif
              
               
                 Captains
              
               
                 Saba●terns
              
               
                 Souldiers
              
               
                 Serjeants
              
               
                 Muskets
                 &
                 Pikes
              
               
                 Profile
                 for
                 Trenches
              
               
                 Profile
                 for
                 Redoubts
              
            
             
               All
               the
               Companies
               being
               drawn
               up
               ,
               they
               shall
               begin
               to
               March
               ,
               and
               must
               range
               themselves
               in
               Squadrons
               and
               Battalions
               ,
               to
               be
               afterwards
               embattel'd
               in
               the
               Ground
               marked
               out
               by
               the
               Marshal
               of
               the
               Camp
               ,
               or
               his
               Assistants
               .
            
             
               The
               Marshal
               of
               the
               Camp
               ought
               in
               the
               first
               place
               to
               be
               exactly
               informed
               of
               the
               condition
               of
               the
               Country
               through
               which
               the
               Army
               is
               to
               march
               ;
               taking
               his
               Instructions
               from
               the
               general
               and
               particular
               Maps
               of
               the
               Country
               ,
               or
               from
               the
               Information
               of
               the
               Country
               People
               .
            
             
               He
               shall
               draw
               up
               his
               Men
               in
               Battel-Array
               ,
               according
               as
               he
               thinks
               most
               convenient
               ,
               or
               as
               the
               General
               shall
               have
               given
               him
               Order
               .
               If
               it
               be
               through
               a
               plain
               and
               open
               Country
               ,
               which
               is
               convenient
               for
               the
               Cavalry
               ,
               the
               Artillery
               and
               Waggons
               ,
               then
               let
               him
               extend
               the
               Wings
               of
               the
               Army
               ,
               and
               observe
               the
               following
               Order
               .
            
             
               He
               shall
               divide
               his
               Army
               into
               three
               Bodies
               ,
               that
               in
               the
               middle
               must
               consist
               of
               three
               Thirds
               of
               the
               whole
               Infantry
               ,
               drawn
               up
               in
               great
               Bodies
               and
               Battalions
               ,
               each
               consisting
               of
               two
               or
               three
               Regiments
               .
            
             
               Upon
               the
               Wings
               or
               Flank
               of
               this
               Infantry
               ,
               must
               be
               placed
               the
               great
               Artillery
               ,
               guarded
               by
               some
               Battalion
               of
               the
               Infantry
               .
            
             
               Upon
               the
               Right
               and
               Left
               Wing
               of
               this
               middle
               Line
               shall
               the
               Cavalry
               march
               ,
               in
               little
               Squadrons
               ,
               each
               consisting
               of
               two
               Cornets
               .
               The
               rest
               of
               the
               Infantry
               marching
               in
               little
               Bodies
               ,
               shall
               enclose
               between
               it
               and
               the
               Cavalry
               ,
               the
               Baggage
               and
               Ammunition
               of
               the
               Army
               ,
               with
               some
               Field
               .
               
               Pieces
               ;
               as
               may
               be
               observed
               by
               the
               March
               represented
               in
               the
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               VII
               .
            
             
               Of
               the
               March
               of
               an
               Army
               through
               an
               Enemies
               Country
               .
            
             
               IF
               there
               be
               a
               Necessity
               to
               carry
               the
               War
               into
               the
               Enemies
               Country
               ,
               either
               to
               Besiege
               some
               place
               therein
               ;
               or
               else
               for
               the
               Relief
               of
               some
               place
               already
               besieged
               ,
               whether
               the
               Enemy
               be
               beaten
               in
               the
               Field
               ,
               or
               whether
               he
               still
               keep
               the
               Field
               to
               put
               new
               Supplies
               of
               Men
               and
               Provision
               into
               the
               Garrison
               ,
               or
               hinder
               Provision
               from
               being
               brought
               to
               the
               Enemies
               Camp.
               
            
             
               Upon
               all
               these
               Occasions
               whether
               he
               encamp
               in
               the
               Field
               ,
               or
               Quarter
               in
               Villages
               ,
               the
               General
               must
               take
               care
               that
               the
               Commissary
               General
               of
               the
               Victuals
               ,
               and
               the
               Treasurers
               at
               War
               be
               diligent
               and
               faithful
               in
               their
               Charge
               ,
               in
               providing
               and
               furnishing
               the
               Army
               with
               Victuals
               .
            
             
               If
               the
               Enemy
               has
               been
               routed
               ,
               and
               be
               not
               in
               a
               condition
               to
               recruit
               ,
               then
               you
               may
               march
               as
               in
               the
               preceeding
               Pages
               ,
               whether
               the
               Country
               be
               open
               or
               streighter
               .
            
             
               
                 Plate
                 VI.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 Plate
                 VIII
              
            
             
             
               The
               Cavalry
               must
               be
               placed
               upon
               the
               Wings
               ,
               in
               Front
               and
               in
               the
               Reer
               of
               the
               Bodies
               .
               The
               Infantry
               must
               march
               in
               the
               middle
               ,
               and
               in
               a
               gross
               Battalion
               .
               The
               Artillery
               upon
               one
               side
               ,
               guarded
               by
               some
               old
               Regiments
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               in
               the
               Plate
               .
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               VIII
               .
            
             
               General
               Directions
               for
               Encamping
               an
               Army
               .
            
             
               WHEN
               the
               Camp-Master
               General
               ,
               or
               Major-General
               hath
               read
               the
               Number
               of
               the
               Horse
               and
               Foot
               that
               are
               in
               the
               Army
               ,
               he
               must
               proportion
               and
               cast
               up
               what
               space
               of
               Ground
               will
               suffice
               to
               encamp
               them
               with
               all
               their
               Provision
               ,
               Carriages
               ,
               and
               so
               that
               neither
               for
               due
               Room
               the
               Soldiers
               be
               pestered
               ,
               nor
               by
               over
               large
               Spaces
               the
               Camp
               not
               sufficiently
               fortified
               .
            
             
               This
               being
               of
               great
               Importance
               ,
               it
               will
               be
               requisite
               for
               him
               to
               understand
               well
               Arithmetick
               and
               Geometry
               ,
               and
               to
               have
               in
               readiness
               sundry
               Plats
               and
               Models
               ,
               and
               Forms
               of
               Camps
               whereby
               he
               may
               suddenly
               resolve
               for
               any
               Number
               or
               Situation
               ,
               what
               Form
               and
               Quality
               is
               most
               convenient
               ,
               and
               presently
               stake
               it
               out
               ;
               assigning
               due
               place
               for
               every
               Regiment
               of
               Horse
               and
               Foot.
               
            
             
               Before
               Encamping
               he
               ought
               to
               consider
               ,
               if
               the
               Army
               consist
               much
               of
               Horse
               ,
               that
               there
               be
               good
               store
               of
               Forrage
               nigh
               the
               Camp
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Camp
               be
               not
               subject
               to
               any
               Hill
               from
               whence
               the
               
               Enemy
               may
               with
               his
               great
               Artillery
               incommode
               it
               :
               Nor
               that
               it
               be
               so
               separated
               from
               Water
               ,
               that
               the
               Enemy
               may
               easily
               cut
               you
               from
               it
               ;
               nor
               that
               it
               be
               so
               low
               ,
               as
               that
               the
               Enemy
               by
               cutting
               the
               Banks
               of
               any
               River
               ,
               may
               drown
               the
               Camp.
               And
               if
               there
               be
               no
               great
               Rivers
               ,
               but
               only
               Fountains
               or
               Wells
               of
               Water
               ,
               then
               must
               good
               Watch
               be
               kept
               that
               they
               be
               not
               poysoned
               nor
               infected
               by
               the
               Enemy
               .
               In
               a
               running
               or
               moveable
               Camp
               ,
               the
               readiest
               Fortification
               is
               to
               impale
               it
               round
               with
               the
               Carriages
               chained
               together
               ,
               bending
               the
               Artillery
               that
               way
               where
               most
               suspicion
               is
               the
               Enemy
               will
               approach
               ;
               and
               if
               time
               permit
               ,
               to
               cast
               some
               Trench
               also
               without
               the
               Carriages
               .
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               IX
               .
            
             
               The
               manner
               of
               Ranging
               a
               Battel
               in
               order
               to
               a
               present
               Engagement
               .
            
             
               
                 Plate
                 IX
                 .
              
            
             
             
               Sometimes
               he
               engages
               himself
               voluntarily
               ,
               designing
               to
               relieve
               some
               place
               that
               is
               Besieged
               .
               But
               what
               way
               soever
               it
               be
               ,
               that
               he
               is
               forced
               to
               come
               to
               a
               Battel
               ,
               he
               must
               endeavour
               to
               order
               his
               Men
               after
               the
               following
               manner
               .
            
             
               He
               shall
               range
               his
               Infantry
               in
               Battalions
               ,
               every
               one
               consisting
               of
               five
               or
               six
               hundred
               Men
               ,
               or
               a
               thousand
               Men
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               most
               convenient
               Numbers
               ,
               with
               the
               Numbers
               between
               ,
               to
               form
               a
               just
               Body
               .
               For
               those
               Bodies
               that
               exceed
               the
               number
               of
               a
               thousand
               ,
               can
               never
               be
               drawn
               up
               conveniently
               upon
               all
               sorts
               of
               Ground
               ;
               and
               such
               as
               are
               under
               500
               will
               never
               be
               strong
               enough
               to
               resist
               at
               the
               same
               time
               the
               fury
               of
               the
               Enemies
               Horse
               .
            
             
               His
               Cavalry
               which
               should
               be
               always
               drawn
               up
               upon
               the
               Wings
               of
               the
               Infantry
               ,
               must
               be
               drawn
               up
               in
               Squadrons
               ,
               consisting
               of
               an
               hundred
               and
               twenty
               or
               thereabouts
               .
               But
               the
               best
               and
               those
               that
               are
               most
               serviceable
               to
               break
               the
               Battalions
               of
               the
               Enemy
               ,
               are
               those
               that
               consist
               of
               150
               or
               200
               at
               most
               ;
               for
               if
               they
               exceed
               the
               number
               of
               200
               ,
               they
               are
               not
               easily
               ,
               nor
               conveniently
               drawn
               up
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               length
               of
               their
               Ranks
               ,
               and
               the
               number
               of
               Horses
               .
               And
               thus
               it
               was
               that
               the
               late
               Duke
               
                 de
                 Schonberg
              
               Embattled
               his
               Forces
               at
               the
               Battel
               of
               Montesclar
               ,
               which
               he
               won
               from
               the
               Marquess
               of
               Caracene
               .
            
             
               An
               Army
               which
               is
               Embattelled
               in
               small
               Divisions
               of
               Horse
               and
               Foot
               ,
               is
               not
               so
               easily
               routed
               as
               that
               Army
               which
               is
               Embattelled
               in
               great
               Divisions
               .
               And
               small
               Divisions
               are
               much
               more
               ready
               than
               great
               :
               For
               besides
               seconding
               one
               another
               ,
               and
               wheeling
               upon
               all
               occasions
               ,
               they
               will
               likewise
               outfront
               an
               Army
               which
               is
               Embattled
               
               in
               great
               Divisions
               :
               The
               which
               is
               one
               of
               the
               greatest
               advantages
               that
               can
               be
               taken
               in
               the
               Embatteling
               of
               an
               Army
               .
               Small
               Divisions
               of
               Horse
               and
               Foot
               are
               also
               much
               readier
               for
               service
               ,
               where
               you
               cannot
               Embattel
               them
               according
               to
               the
               Rules
               of
               Art
               by
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               or
               with
               Inclosures
               ,
               or
               where
               the
               brevity
               of
               time
               will
               not
               give
               you
               leave
               ;
               besides
               ,
               small
               Divisions
               are
               much
               more
               troublesome
               for
               an
               Enemy
               to
               deal
               withal
               ,
               than
               an
               Army
               that
               is
               Embatteled
               in
               great
               Divisions
               .
            
             
               FINIS
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             OF
             FORTIFICATION
             .
          
           
             PART
             II.
             
          
           
             
               Of
               general
               Maxims
               or
               Rules
               observed
               in
               Fortifications
               .
            
             
               IN
               the
               handling
               of
               this
               Part
               I
               shall
               be
               plain
               ,
               yet
               brief
               as
               possible
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               General
               Maxim
               is
               ,
               That
               all
               the
               parts
               of
               the
               Place
               ,
               be
               of
               Cannon
               Proof
               Flanked
               ,
               
                 i.
                 e.
              
               defended
               from
               another
               place
               ,
               which
               place
               is
               not
               further
               distant
               ,
               than
               the
               reach
               of
               a
               Musket-shot
               from
               the
               place
               to
               be
               flanked
               or
               defended
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               in
               all
               the
               Place
               ,
               there
               may
               be
               no
               part
               of
               the
               Wall
               ,
               or
               outside
               of
               the
               Rampire
               ,
               that
               is
               not
               seen
               from
               the
               top
               to
               the
               bottom
               of
               the
               Mote
               or
               Ditch
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               the
               Bastions
               are
               large
               ,
               and
               full
               of
               Earth
               ,
               and
               not
               empty
               ;
               the
               bigger
               they
               are
               ,
               they
               are
               the
               more
               to
               be
               esteemed
               ,
               there
               being
               the
               more
               
               room
               to
               intrench
               in
               case
               of
               necessity
               :
               whose
               Gorge
               let
               be
               at
               least
               35
               fathoms
               ,
               and
               their
               flank
               at
               least
               18
               fathoms
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               That
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Bastion
               or
               
                 flanked
                 Angle
              
               ,
               be
               not
               much
               above
               90
               ,
               nor
               much
               less
               than
               60
               Degrees
               ,
               for
               in
               the
               former
               it
               would
               be
               too
               very
               Obtuse
               ,
               and
               open
               ,
               at
               the
               Point
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               latter
               it
               would
               be
               too
               slender
               ,
               and
               so
               easily
               to
               be
               battered
               down
               by
               the
               Enemies
               Cannon
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               That
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               flank
               may
               be
               somewhat
               Obtuse
               ;
               neither
               is
               there
               any
               more
               virtue
               in
               a
               Right-Angle
               ,
               than
               any
               other
               ,
               for
               the
               defence
               of
               the
               Fort.
               
            
             
               6.
               
               That
               the
               length
               of
               an
               extended
               Curtain
               be
               not
               above
               135
               Fathoms
               ,
               nor
               the
               single
               above
               80
               ▪
               Fathoms
               ,
               nor
               be
               less
               than
               40
               Fathoms
               ,
               to
               be
               well
               defended
               from
               two
               Flanks
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               That
               the
               Rampier
               be
               so
               wide
               ,
               that
               so
               a
               Parapet
               of
               Earth
               Cannon-proof
               may
               be
               erected
               thereon
               ,
               and
               a
               Teraplane
               left
               ,
               full
               wide
               for
               the
               Ordnance
               to
               be
               recoiled
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               That
               the
               Mote
               or
               Ditch
               be
               at
               least
               20
               Fathoms
               broad
               ,
               and
               as
               deep
               as
               possible
               .
               Now
               dry
               Motes
               in
               great
               Cities
               are
               to
               be
               preferred
               before
               others
               that
               are
               full
               of
               Water
               ,
               to
               facilitate
               the
               Sallies
               ,
               the
               relief
               and
               retreat
               of
               the
               Besieged
               ;
               and
               in
               small
               Fortifications
               the
               Motes
               full
               of
               Water
               are
               the
               most
               esteemable
               ,
               because
               in
               such
               ,
               Sallies
               are
               not
               necessary
               ,
               and
               Supplies
               are
               very
               much
               to
               be
               feared
               .
            
             
               9.
               
               That
               the
               Parts
               that
               are
               most
               remote
               from
               the
               Center
               ,
               be
               commanded
               by
               those
               which
               are
               nearest
               to
               it
               .
            
             
               10.
               
               That
               the
               Defence
               of
               a
               Face
               is
               much
               stronger
               ,
               when
               the
               Angle
               made
               by
               the
               Face
               and
               
                 Exterior
                 
                 
                 
                 
                 Polygon
              
               is
               a
               great
               Angle
               ;
               this
               Maxim
               is
               so
               very
               essential
               ,
               that
               it
               will
               try
               the
               goodness
               of
               any
               Fortification
               whatsoever
               .
               Thus
               I
               have
               described
               the
               Ten
               chiefest
               Maxims
               ,
               necessary
               for
               good
               Fortifications
               .
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               I.
               
            
             
               
                 Of
                 Cazemates
                 .
              
               
                 BEFORE
                 I
                 give
                 you
                 the
                 Measures
                 of
                 my
                 Cazemates
                 ,
                 I
                 shall
                 explain
                 all
                 the
                 parts
                 of
                 which
                 they
                 are
                 compos'd
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 is
                 the
                 
                   winding
                   pair
                   of
                   Stairs
                
                 to
                 descend
                 from
                 the
                 Rampart
                 into
                 the
                 first
                 Cazemate
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 six
                 foot
                 high
                 above
                 the
                 bottom
                 of
                 the
                 Mote
                 ;
                 And
                 this
                 is
                 that
                 which
                 I
                 call
                 the
                 
                   Great
                   Cazemate
                
                 .
              
               
                 B
                 is
                 the
                 
                   Great
                   Cazemate
                
                 seen
                 in
                 part
                 by
                 the
                 Besiegers
                 when
                 they
                 are
                 lodged
                 upon
                 the
                 Level
                 of
                 their
                 Paropets
                 and
                 Courtains
                 .
              
               
                 C.
                 Is
                 the
                 Paropet
                 of
                 the
                 Cazemate
                 ,
                 3
                 or
                 4
                 
                   fathom
                   thick
                
                 to
                 cover
                 the
                 Cannon
                 and
                 the
                 Cannoneers
                 from
                 the
                 sight
                 of
                 the
                 Counter-Batteries
                 of
                 the
                 Besiegers
                 ,
                 when
                 they
                 have
                 either
                 raised
                 or
                 earthed
                 them
                 within
                 the
                 Counterscarps
                 .
              
               
                 D.
                 Is
                 a
                 part
                 of
                 the
                 great
                 Cazemate
                 wrought
                 farther
                 in
                 ,
                 always
                 covered
                 and
                 defended
                 by
                 the
                 
                   Great
                   Ear
                
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   flanked
                   Angle
                
                 of
                 the
                 opposite
                 Bastion
                 .
              
               
                 E.
                 Is
                 its
                 Paropet
                 or
                 Breastwork
                 3
                 or
                 4
                 fathoms
                 thick
                 .
              
               
                 F.
                 Is
                 the
                 Magazine
                 for
                 
                   Powder
                   ,
                   Bullets
                
                 and
                 
                 other
                 Ammunition
                 belonging
                 to
                 the
                 Cazemate
                 ,
                 it
                 must
                 be
                 cover'd
                 and
                 hollow'd
                 inward
                 ,
                 into
                 the
                 solid
                 substance
                 of
                 the
                 Bastion
                 .
              
               
                 G.
                 Is
                 the
                 pair
                 of
                 Stairs
                 into
                 the
                 second
                 Cazemate
                 .
              
               
                 H.
                 Is
                 the
                 second
                 Cazemate
                 that
                 lies
                 out
                 of
                 sight
                 ,
                 as
                 being
                 about
                 
                   two
                   thirds
                
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 not
                 to
                 be
                 seen
                 by
                 the
                 Enemy
                 ,
                 though
                 they
                 should
                 come
                 to
                 be
                 lodged
                 upon
                 the
                 Counterscarps
                 themselves
                 .
              
               
                 I.
                 Is
                 the
                 Paropet
                 of
                 the
                 
                   blind
                   Cazemate
                
                 ,
                 2
                 or
                 3
                 fathom
                 thick
                 .
              
               
                 K.
                 Is
                 its
                 Magazine
                 ,
                 made
                 like
                 the
                 Magazine
                 belonging
                 to
                 the
                 former
                 .
              
               
                 L.
                 Is
                 the
                 
                   third
                   Cazemate
                   not
                   seen
                
                 ,
                 and
                 raised
                 even
                 with
                 the
                 Platform
                 of
                 the
                 Bastion
                 .
                 Upon
                 this
                 may
                 all
                 sorts
                 of
                 Artillery
                 be
                 planted
                 ,
                 to
                 shoot
                 as
                 well
                 above
                 the
                 Paropets
                 ,
                 as
                 through
                 the
                 Holes
                 that
                 are
                 cut
                 through
                 the
                 thickness
                 of
                 the
                 Paropet
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 from
                 2
                 to
                 3
                 fathoms
                 .
              
               
                 M.
                 The
                 Draught
                 of
                 a
                 Platform
                 for
                 the
                 planting
                 of
                 Cannon
                 ,
                 called
                 a
                 Cavalier
                 with
                 its
                 peculiar
                 Magazine
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Structure
                 or
                 Manner
                 of
                 making
                 the
                 Cazemates
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 M.
                 Mallet
                 :
              
               
                 I
                 shall
                 not
                 here
                 go
                 about
                 to
                 entangle
                 my self
                 in
                 a
                 
                   vain
                   Dispute
                
                 with
                 those
                 that
                 would
                 have
                 the
                 word
                 Cazemate
                 to
                 be
                 derived
                 from
                 the
                 Spanish
                 words
                 Caze
                 and
                 Mata
                 ,
                 as
                 if
                 we
                 should
                 say
                 ,
                 
                   A
                   House
                   of
                   Murder
                
                 ;
                 And
                 therefore
                 without
                 more
                 ado
                 ,
                 I
                 come
                 to
                 shew
                 you
                 how
                 my
                 own
                 are
                 made
                 .
              
               
                 Suppose
                 the
                 Bastions
                 to
                 be
                 drawn
                 out
                 in
                 
                   white
                   lines
                
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Scale
                 be
                 made
                 
                   full
                   the
                   length
                
                 of
                 one
                 of
                 the
                 sides
                 of
                 the
                 Polygon
                 ;
                 and
                 that
                 it
                 be
                 
                 divided
                 into
                 as
                 many
                 equal
                 Parts
                 as
                 it
                 contains
                 fathoms
                 ,
                 as
                 has
                 been
                 explained
                 .
                 Then
                 extend
                 the
                 Defence
                 of
                 the
                 Bastion
                 AB
                 ,
                 from
                 6
                 or
                 7
                 fathoms
                 at
                 most
                 ,
                 from
                 B
                 to
                 C
                 ,
                 from
                 the
                 Point
                 C
                 draw
                 CD
                 parallel
                 to
                 the
                 flank
                 BE
                 ,
                 then
                 divide
                 the
                 flank
                 BE
                 into
                 two
                 equal
                 parts
                 ,
                 at
                 the
                 Point
                 F
                 to
                 draw
                 from
                 the
                 Point
                 G
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 middle
                 of
                 the
                 opposite
                 Front
                 AH
                 the
                 Line
                 GF
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 inside
                 of
                 the
                 Bastion
                 ,
                 observing
                 where
                 it
                 cuts
                 CD
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 I
                 ,
                 purposely
                 to
                 carry
                 on
                 one
                 fathom
                 from
                 I
                 to
                 L
                 ,
                 afterwards
                 draw
                 the
                 Line
                 MLN
                 parallel
                 to
                 FI
                 ,
                 the
                 length
                 of
                 which
                 from
                 M
                 to
                 N
                 ,
                 must
                 be
                 11
                 fathom
                 :
                 That
                 done
                 ,
                 make
                 NO
                 parallel
                 to
                 the
                 flank
                 BF
                 ,
                 the
                 length
                 of
                 which
                 from
                 N
                 to
                 O
                 must
                 be
                 4
                 fathom
                 .
                 Lastly
                 ,
                 make
                 OP
                 parallel
                 to
                 FI
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 all
                 the
                 void
                 space
                 BMNOPC
                 shall
                 be
                 the
                 extent
                 of
                 the
                 Cazemates
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 of
                 the
                 large
                 Cazemates
                 ,
                 as
                 those
                 which
                 are
                 more
                 private
                 .
              
               
                 To
                 make
                 the
                 Shoulder
                 or
                 Ear
                 of
                 the
                 Bastion
                 ,
                 draw
                 upon
                 the
                 Line
                 of
                 Defence
                 PS
                 6
                 fathom
                 from
                 E
                 to
                 I
                 ,
                 and
                 upon
                 FG
                 6
                 fathom
                 ;
                 also
                 from
                 F
                 to
                 V
                 and
                 then
                 joining
                 V
                 and
                 T
                 together
                 ,
                 you
                 have
                 the
                 whole
                 Shoulder
                 or
                 Ear
                 FVTE
                 which
                 must
                 be
                 all
                 one
                 solid
                 piece
                 .
                 For
                 the
                 Paropet
                 of
                 the
                 first
                 Cazemate
                 ,
                 you
                 must
                 allow
                 within
                 side
                 one
                 Toise
                 of
                 heighth
                 from
                 3
                 to
                 4
                 in
                 thickness
                 ,
                 with
                 8
                 
                   firing
                   Places
                
                 for
                 the
                 planting
                 of
                 so
                 many
                 
                   great
                   Guns
                
                 ,
                 observing
                 that
                 the
                 Paropets
                 of
                 the
                 Cazemates
                 ,
                 more
                 especially
                 all
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 next
                 to
                 the
                 Gorge
                 ,
                 and
                 lies
                 always
                 hid
                 from
                 the
                 Besiegers
                 ,
                 do
                 not
                 require
                 a
                 length
                 and
                 thickness
                 so
                 precise
                 .
              
               
                 A
                 Ravelin
                 is
                 a
                 Bulk
                 of
                 Earth
                 almost
                 like
                 a
                 Bulwark
                 ,
                 cut
                 off
                 lying
                 beyond
                 the
                 Ditch
                 for
                 the
                 
                 covering
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Courtain
                   ,
                   Bridge
                
                 or
                 Gate
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 surrounded
                 with
                 Water
                 ,
                 and
                 separated
                 from
                 the
                 Fortification
                 by
                 the
                 breadth
                 of
                 the
                 
                   whole
                   Ditch
                
                 ;
                 it
                 is
                 raised
                 but
                 a
                 little
                 heighth
                 above
                 the
                 level
                 of
                 the
                 Ground
                 ;
                 towards
                 the
                 Enemy
                 't
                 is
                 built
                 with
                 a
                 Rampier
                 and
                 Breast-work
                 ,
                 but
                 lies
                 open
                 towards
                 the
                 Fortification
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               II.
               
            
             
               The
               Raising
               of
               Cittadels
               with
               five
               Bastions
               ,
               which
               are
               built
               upon
               the
               Walls
               of
               Cities
               .
            
             
               WHEN
               Cities
               are
               well
               peopled
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               Ground
               will
               suffer
               it
               ,
               't
               is
               usual
               to
               lay
               the
               Cittadels
               towards
               the
               
                 open
                 Field
              
               ,
               to
               prevent
               the
               ruining
               of
               the
               Buildings
               of
               the
               place
               ;
               so
               then
               after
               you
               have
               agreed
               upon
               the
               number
               of
               Bastions
               ,
               as
               here
               for
               Example
               upon
               five
               to
               make
               a
               Pentagon
               .
            
             
               Divide
               one
               Courtain
               of
               the
               City
               AB
               ,
               into
               4
               equal
               parts
               ,
               of
               which
               AC
               comprehends
               three
               .
               This
               Overture
               being
               designed
               at
               the
               Point
               of
               the
               Bastion
               D
               ,
               draw
               the
               Circumference
               EFHGF
               that
               you
               may
               have
               the
               five
               sides
               of
               the
               Polygon
               EIIHHGGF
               and
               FE
               putting
               the
               Point
               E
               directly
               where
               the
               Circumference
               cuts
               the
               Center-Line
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               which
               passes
               through
               the
               Point
               D.
               This
               will
               produce
               two
               Bastions
               on
               the
               City
               side
               ,
               and
               three
               towards
               the
               
                 open
                 Field
              
               .
            
             
               
                 Plate
                 II.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 OBSERVATION
                 .
              
               
                 Remember
                 that
                 you
                 are
                 always
                 to
                 throw
                 down
                 the
                 Defences
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 of
                 the
                 
                   City
                   side
                
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 that
                 if
                 the
                 Inhabitants
                 should
                 happen
                 to
                 revolt
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 Enemy
                 to
                 become
                 Masters
                 of
                 it
                 ,
                 they
                 may
                 not
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 make
                 
                   any
                   advantage
                
                 of
                 their
                 own
                 Fortifications
                 ,
                 especially
                 the
                 flanks
                 L
                 and
                 M
                 ,
                 which
                 must
                 be
                 ruin'd
                 ,
                 continuing
                 their
                 Faces
                 in
                 a
                 
                   Right
                   Line
                
                 ,
                 and
                 sloping
                 down
                 the
                 Ramparts
                 to
                 the
                 Mote
                 of
                 the
                 Cittadel
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 end
                 she
                 may
                 be
                 able
                 to
                 command
                 the
                 whole
                 City
                 .
              
               
                 Observe
                 moreover
                 ,
                 That
                 there
                 may
                 be
                 a
                 
                   great
                   space
                
                 between
                 the
                 Mote
                 of
                 the
                 Cittadel
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 Houses
                 of
                 the
                 City
                 ;
                 for
                 this
                 space
                 is
                 of
                 
                   great
                   importance
                
                 to
                 prevent
                 any
                 designs
                 which
                 the
                 Citizens
                 may
                 have
                 upon
                 the
                 Citadel
                 ,
                 as
                 not
                 able
                 to
                 approach
                 undiscovered
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   without
                   entrenching
                
                 themselves
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               PLATE
               III.
               
            
             
               Of
               Irregular
               Fortification
               .
            
             
               SINCE
               most
               Cities
               are
               of
               an
               irregular
               Figure
               ,
               't
               is
               evident
               ,
               
                 what
                 great
                 use
              
               ,
               or
               rather
               necessity
               ,
               there
               is
               of
               this
               part
               .
               I
               shall
               comprehend
               
               
               
               
               
               all
               the
               matter
               briefly
               ,
               but
               plainly
               in
               the
               following
               Heads
               .
            
             
               First
               ,
               Such
               Figures
               as
               have
               not
               their
               Sides
               and
               Angles
               equal
               to
               one
               another
               ,
               are
               called
               Irregular
               .
            
             
               Now
               forasmuch
               as
               the
               Forms
               of
               Towns
               are
               so
               various
               and
               subject
               to
               so
               many
               Cases
               ,
               their
               Fortification
               cannot
               be
               comprehended
               under
               certain
               Rules
               ,
               neither
               can
               the
               Principles
               of
               
                 Regular
                 Fortification
              
               be
               exactly
               observed
               here
               ;
               It
               is
               therefore
               requisite
               that
               the
               Engineer
               make
               a
               Map
               or
               Draught
               of
               the
               whole
               ,
               with
               all
               the
               
                 Ways
                 ,
                 Passages
                 ,
                 Rivers
                 ,
                 Pools
                 ,
                 Enclosures
                 ,
              
               and
               all
               other
               matters
               fit
               to
               be
               known
               ,
               and
               then
               consider
               what
               Designs
               and
               Works
               he
               shall
               think
               most
               fit
               and
               proper
               for
               the
               place
               .
               To
               this
               end
               let
               him
               know
               ,
            
             
               1.
               
               That
               the
               same
               Laws
               and
               Maxims
               for
               Regular
               Fortifications
               ,
               stand
               and
               be
               in
               force
               ,
               as
               for
               the
               Irregular
               ;
               and
               that
               the
               nearer
               an
               
                 Irregular
                 Figure
              
               comes
               to
               a
               Regular
               ,
               the
               stronger
               and
               better
               it
               is
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               none
               of
               the
               
                 inward
                 Angles
              
               of
               his
               Figure
               be
               less
               than
               90
               degrees
               ;
               if
               less
               ,
               then
               they
               must
               be
               changed
               ,
               by
               making
               the
               Point
               ,
               the
               outward
               Point
               of
               a
               Bastion
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               the
               Angles
               of
               the
               Bastion
               be
               not
               less
               than
               60
               degrees
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               That
               the
               Line
               of
               Defence
               ,
               or
               side
               of
               an
               
                 Irregular
                 Figure
              
               ,
               must
               not
               be
               more
               than
               Musquet-shot
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               Sides
               of
               an
               Irregular
               Figure
               ,
               which
               is
               too
               long
               for
               two
               Bastions
               ,
               and
               too
               short
               for
               three
               ,
               may
               be
               fortified
               with
               two
               great
               Bulwarks
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               When
               the
               side
               is
               above
               70
               Rod
               ,
               there
               may
               be
               a
               Ravelin
               erected
               between
               the
               two
               Bulwarks
               ,
               or
               a
               flat
               Bulwark
               built
               between
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               When
               an
               Angle
               of
               the
               Figure
               is
               between
               80
               or
               90
               degrees
               ,
               it
               ought
               to
               be
               fortified
               with
               a
               Horn-work
               .
            
             
             
               8.
               
               All
               the
               differences
               between
               Regular
               and
               
                 Irregular
                 Fortifications
              
               ,
               consists
               in
               the
               rectifying
               the
               Sides
               that
               are
               too
               short
               or
               too
               long
               ,
               and
               altering
               the
               Angles
               that
               are
               too
               little
               ,
               by
               cutting
               off
               from
               the
               length
               ,
               what
               is
               too
               much
               ,
               or
               adding
               to
               it
               ,
               what
               is
               necessary
               ,
               to
               make
               them
               in
               their
               just
               and
               
                 true
                 proportions
              
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Regular
               .
            
             
               More
               Rules
               might
               be
               given
               ,
               but
               there
               being
               so
               
                 much
                 variety
              
               in
               this
               sort
               of
               Fortifications
               ,
               the
               Engineer
               must
               practise
               by
               himself
               ,
               by
               drawing
               several
               Plats
               of
               
                 Irregular
                 Places
              
               ,
               and
               fortifie
               them
               .
               And
               he
               should
               also
               peruse
               all
               the
               Books
               he
               can
               get
               of
               this
               Subject
               ,
               as
               
                 Marolos
                 ,
                 Fritach
                 ,
                 Dogen
                 ,
                 Dilichius
                 ,
                 Travax
                 de
                 Mars
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               where
               he
               will
               find
               variety
               of
               Examples
               which
               will
               help
               to
               inform
               his
               Fancy
               ,
               and
               rectifie
               his
               Judgment
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               Raising
               the
               
                 Ramparts
                 ,
                 Paropets
              
               and
               other
               Works
               ,
               you
               must
               observe
               the
               same
               Rules
               ,
               and
               proceed
               in
               the
               same
               Method
               as
               in
               Regular
               ,
               and
               no
               otherwise
               .
            
             
               A.
               Is
               a
               
                 Regular
                 Bastion
              
               ,
               and
               here
               I
               shall
               give
               one
               Rule
               to
               find
               the
               
                 Capital
                 Line
              
               in
               all
               irregular
               Angles
               ,
               viz.
               At
               the
               end
               of
               each
               Courtain
               ,
               as
               a●
               e
               d
               ,
               cross
               an
               Arch
               at
               c
               and
               f.
               and
               draw
               the
               line
               c
               a
               ,
               which
               shall
               be
               the
               
                 Capital
                 Line
              
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               about
               243
               Feet
               ,
               a
               little
               more
               or
               less
               ,
               and
               the
               Gorges
               may
               be
               one
               hundred
               forty
               five
               or
               150
               ,
               Feet
               ,
               or
               thereabouts
               .
            
             
               B.
               Is
               a
               
                 double
                 Bastion
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               upon
               the
               Plane
               of
               the
               great
               Bastion
               ,
               another
               Bastion
               is
               built
               upon
               it
               higher
               :
               This
               hath
               the
               use
               of
               a
               Cavalier
               ,
               and
               overlooks
               the
               Campagne
               ;
               there
               may
               be
               about
               12
               or
               18
               feet
               left
               between
               the
               Paropet
               of
               the
               
                 lower
                 Bastion
              
               ,
               and
               the
               foot
               of
               the
               
                 higher
                 Bastion
              
               .
            
             
               C.
               Is
               a
               
                 Bastion
                 composed
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               when
               the
               two
               
               
                 interior
                 Polygons
              
               are
               much
               unequal
               ,
               then
               the
               Gorges
               will
               be
               unequal
               .
            
             
               D.
               Is
               a
               Bastion
               deformed
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               if
               one
               of
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygons
              
               be
               so
               short
               that
               it
               can
               have
               no
               Demigorge
               .
            
             
               E.
               Is
               a
               
                 Plat
                 Bastion
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               if
               the
               distance
               from
               the
               Points
               of
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               be
               double
               to
               the
               usual
               length
               .
            
             
               F.
               Is
               a
               
                 forked
                 Bastion
              
               ,
               cut
               off
               with
               a
               Tenaile
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               if
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Figure
               be
               less
               than
               90
               degrees
               ;
               and
               because
               of
               Water
               ,
               or
               some
               other
               Accident
               ,
               it
               cannot
               be
               changed
               ,
               then
               you
               may
               cut
               off
               the
               Angle
               ,
               and
               joyn
               it
               with
               a
               Tenaile
               .
            
             
               G.
               Is
               a
               
                 Bastion
                 cut
                 off
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               separated
               from
               the
               Rampire
               ,
               so
               that
               its
               Gorges
               are
               in
               a
               
                 Right
                 Line
              
               with
               the
               two
               Points
               of
               the
               flanks
               HF.
               
            
             
               H.
               Is
               a
               Demi-Bastion
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               such
               as
               have
               their
               Gorge
               and
               Capital
               equal
               ,
               and
               its
               flank
               half
               of
               the
               Gorge
               .
            
             
               I.
               Is
               a
               Platform
               upon
               an
               
                 inward
                 Angle
              
               ,
               for
               the
               placing
               of
               
                 great
                 Guns
              
               to
               scour
               the
               Ditch
               .
            
             
               L.
               Is
               a
               
                 Mount
                 upon
                 Piles
              
               for
               a
               
                 Corps
                 du
                 Guard
              
               ,
               with
               a
               Paropet
               ,
               like
               that
               of
               the
               
                 Outworks
                 ,
                 Cannon-proof
              
               ,
               necessary
               to
               hinder
               the
               
                 Vnder
                 surprises
              
               when
               the
               Mote
               is
               frozen
               .
            
             
               M.
               Is
               an
               
                 indented
                 Line
              
               ,
               often
               used
               upon
               the
               Bank
               af
               the
               Counterscarp
               ,
               or
               upon
               a
               River
               .
            
             
               N.
               Is
               a
               Counter-Guard
               ,
               or
               Demi-Bastion
               ,
               built
               in
               some
               watry
               place
               before
               the
               main
               Bastion
               .
            
             
               O.
               Is
               a
               Scillen
               ,
               or
               a
               Tenail
               with
               a
               Breast-work
               placed
               in
               the
               Mote
               ,
               called
               also
               a
               Counterguard
               .
            
             
          
           
             
             
               Plate
               IV.
               
            
             
               For
               the
               Constitution
               and
               Ground-lines
               of
               a
               Fortification
               ,
               some
               things
               ought
               to
               be
               known
               or
               given
               ;
               The
               things
               here
               ,
               said
               to
               be
               given
               ,
               are
               those
               
               Data's
               ,
               which
               a
               skilful
               or
               experienced
               Engenier
               knows
               to
               agree
               best
               with
               the
               Rules
               or
               Maxims
               before
               mentioned
               ;
               and
               from
               these
               
               Data's
               ,
               once
               ordered
               ,
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Parts
               ,
               in
               proportion
               ,
               follow
               sure
               and
               determined
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Reason
               of
               things
               given
               ;
               for
               which
               use
               the
               Two
               following
               Tables
               are
               made
               ,
               by
               which
               may
               be
               laid
               down
               any
               Fortification
               required
               :
               The
               proportion
               of
               the
               Lines
               ,
               serving
               for
               any
               form
               ,
               the
               quantity
               only
               for
               the
               Royal
               ;
               the
               Numbers
               are
               
                 Rhynland
                 Rods
              
               ,
               and
               Centesmes
               of
               a
               Rod
               of
               12
               Feet
               .
            
             
             
               
                 
                   First
                   Table
                   for
                   the
                   Lines
                   .
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     Semidiameter
                     .
                  
                   
                     Pol
                     gon
                     Inter.
                     
                  
                   
                     Gorge
                     .
                  
                   
                     Capital
                  
                   
                     Flank
                     .
                  
                   
                     Second
                     Flank
                     .
                  
                   
                     Courtin
                  
                   
                     Face
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IV
                  
                   
                     42
                  
                   
                     76
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                     57
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                     83
                  
                   
                     7
                  
                   
                     74
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     94
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     V
                  
                   
                     52
                  
                   
                     34
                  
                   
                     61
                  
                   
                     54
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     77
                  
                   
                     17
                  
                   
                     33
                  
                   
                     9
                  
                   
                     09
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VI
                  
                   
                     62
                  
                   
                     39
                  
                   
                     62
                  
                   
                     39
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     19
                  
                   
                     18
                  
                   
                     71
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     07
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     02
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VII
                  
                   
                     72
                  
                   
                     68
                  
                   
                     63
                  
                   
                     07
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     53
                  
                   
                     20
                  
                   
                     03
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     83
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     89
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VIII
                  
                   
                     83
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                     63
                  
                   
                     64
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     82
                  
                   
                     21
                  
                   
                     29
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     44
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     27
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IX
                  
                   
                     83
                  
                   
                     70
                  
                   
                     64
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     05
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                     99
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     61
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     41
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     X
                  
                   
                     103
                  
                   
                     38
                  
                   
                     63
                  
                   
                     89
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     94
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     07
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     41
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     XI
                  
                   
                     114
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     64
                  
                   
                     33
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     16
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     49
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     02
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     XII
                  
                   
                     124
                  
                   
                     77
                  
                   
                     64
                  
                   
                     39
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     29
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     85
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   Second
                   Table
                   for
                   the
                   Lines
                   .
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     Semediameter
                     .
                  
                   
                     Polygon
                     inter
                  
                   
                     Gorge
                     .
                  
                   
                     Capital
                  
                   
                     Flank
                     .
                  
                   
                     Second
                     Flank
                     .
                  
                   
                     Courtin
                  
                   
                     Face
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IV
                  
                   
                     38
                  
                   
                     4
                  
                   
                     53
                  
                   
                     94
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     97
                  
                   
                     20
                  
                   
                     01
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     06
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     V
                  
                   
                     48
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     56
                  
                   
                     53
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     26
                  
                   
                     21
                  
                   
                     03
                  
                   
                     9
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     58
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VI
                  
                   
                     59
                  
                   
                     19
                  
                   
                     58
                  
                   
                     19
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     86
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VII
                  
                   
                     68
                  
                   
                     47
                  
                   
                     59
                  
                   
                     4●
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     71
                  
                   
                     23
                  
                   
                     31
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     03
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VIII
                  
                   
                     78
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                     31
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     16
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     48
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     67
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IX
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                     3●
                  
                   
                     61
                  
                   
                     77
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     89
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     64
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     95
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     X
                  
                   
                     101
                  
                   
                     84
                  
                   
                     62
                  
                   
                     94
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     47
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     66
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     XI
                  
                   
                     113
                  
                   
                     38
                  
                   
                     63
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     95
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     76
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     63
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     X●I
                  
                   
                     124
                  
                   
                     77
                  
                   
                     64
                  
                   
                     59
                  
                   
                     14
                  
                   
                     29
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     85
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
              
            
             
             
               
                 
                   For
                   the
                   Angles
                   first
                   Table
                   .
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     of
                     the
                     Centre
                     .
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     of
                     the
                     Figure
                     .
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     of
                     the
                     Bulwark
                     .
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     C
                     F
                     A
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     A
                     C
                     F
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IV
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     98
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     65
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                     77
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                
                 
                   
                     V
                  
                   
                     72
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     108
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     72
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     17
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     73
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VI
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     120
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     80
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     20
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     70
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VII
                  
                   
                     51
                  
                   
                     25
                  
                   
                     43
                  
                   
                     128
                  
                   
                     34
                  
                   
                     17
                  
                   
                     84
                  
                   
                     17
                  
                   
                     03
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     34
                  
                   
                     67
                  
                   
                     51
                  
                   
                     26
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VIII
                  
                   
                     45
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     135
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     87
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                     23
                  
                   
                     45
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     66
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IX
                  
                   
                     40
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     140
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     25
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     65
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     X
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     144
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     27
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     63
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     XI
                  
                   
                     32
                  
                   
                     13
                  
                   
                     38
                  
                   
                     147
                  
                   
                     16
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     28
                  
                   
                     18
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     61
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                
                 
                   
                     XII
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     150
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   For
                   the
                   Angles
                   second
                   Table
                   .
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     of
                     the
                     Centre
                     .
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     of
                     the
                     Figure
                     .
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     of
                     the
                     Bulwark
                     .
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     C
                     F
                     A
                  
                   
                     Angle
                     A
                     C
                     F
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IV
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     75
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
                 
                   
                     V
                  
                   
                     72
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     108
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     69
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     19
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                     70
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VI
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     120
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     75
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                     67
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VII
                  
                   
                     51
                  
                   
                     25
                  
                   
                     43
                  
                   
                     128
                  
                   
                     34
                  
                   
                     17
                  
                   
                     79
                  
                   
                     17
                  
                   
                     09
                  
                   
                     24
                  
                   
                     38
                  
                   
                     34
                  
                   
                     65
                  
                   
                     21
                  
                   
                     26
                  
                
                 
                   
                     VIII
                  
                   
                     45
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     135
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     82
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     26
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     15
                  
                   
                     63
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     45
                  
                
                 
                   
                     IX
                  
                   
                     40
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     140
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     85
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     27
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                     62
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                
                 
                   
                     X
                  
                   
                     36
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     144
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     87
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     28
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                     61
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                
                 
                   
                     XI
                  
                   
                     32
                  
                   
                     43
                  
                   
                     38
                  
                   
                     147
                  
                   
                     16
                  
                   
                     22
                  
                   
                     88
                  
                   
                     38
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     29
                  
                   
                     19
                  
                   
                     05
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                     40
                  
                   
                     55
                  
                
                 
                   
                     XII
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     150
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     30
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     60
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                   
                     00
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
             
               How
               to
               Delineat
               any
               Fort
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Proportions
               in
               these
               Tables
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               make
               a
               
                 Square
                 Figure
              
               ,
               a
               
                 Pentagon
                 ,
                 Hexagon
                 ,
                 Heptagon
              
               ,
               &c.
               
               Having
               no
               Scale
               or
               Sector
               ,
               then
               you
               may
               make
               a
               Scale
               large
               or
               small
               ,
               as
               you
               design
               to
               make
               your
               Polygon
               ;
               dividing
               it
               into
               ten
               equal
               Parts
               ,
               and
               every
               10
               th
               .
               into
               ten
               ,
               then
               the
               Scale
               will
               be
               divided
               into
               100
               equal
               parts
               ,
               then
               supposing
               each
               part
               subdivided
               into
               10
               ,
               so
               the
               whole
               Scale
               will
               be
               1000.
               
               Plate
               4.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               delineat
               a
               great
               Royal
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               proportions
               in
               the
               first
               Table
               ,
               take
               out
               of
               that
               Table
               the
               Semidiameter
               ,
               or
               Radius
               ,
               of
               that
               Polygon
               ,
               which
               you
               intend
               to
               draw
               ;
               (
               for
               Example
               ,
               an
               Hexagon
               ;
               )
               which
               is
               in
               the
               Table
               ,
               62.
               39.
               that
               is
               ,
               62
               Rods
               ,
               3
               Foot
               ,
               and
               9
               tentbs
               of
               a
               Foot
               ,
               or
               62
               Rods
               ,
               and
               39
               Centesmes
               of
               a
               Rod
               ,
               which
               take
               off
               from
               the
               Scale
               ,
               and
               de●cribe
               a
               Circle
               ,
               as
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ▪
               5
               ,
               6.
               as
               in
               Fig.
               2.
               
               Plate
               the
               4
               th
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Take
               off
               the
               Scale
               the
               length
               of
               the
               interior
               Polygon
               ,
               62.
               39.
               or
               side
               of
               the
               Figure
               ,
               
               which
               the
               Table
               shews
               that
               distance
               ,
               apply
               it
               to
               the
               Circumference
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               7
               ,
               8
               or
               9
               times
               ,
               as
               the
               Polygon
               is
               that
               you
               intend
               to
               draw
               ,
               which
               is
               6
               times
               in
               the
               Hexagon
               ;
               draw
               the
               blind
               lines
               from
               the
               Centre
               ,
               and
               through
               the
               several
               Divisions
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               and
               Lines
               from
               1
               to
               2
               ,
               and
               from
               2
               to
               3
               ,
               and
               from
               3
               to
               4
               ,
               and
               from
               4
               to
               5
               ,
               and
               from
               5
               to
               6.
               
            
             
               4
               Take
               off
               from
               the
               Scale
               ,
               the
               
                 Capital
                 Line
              
               ,
               18.
               73.
               as
               in
               the
               Table
               ,
               and
               set
               it
               off
               at
               all
               the
               Angles
               of
               the
               Ground-plot
               ,
               viz
               ,
               from
               1
               to
               2
               ,
               and
               from
               2
               to
               3
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               5.
               
               Take
               the
               length
               of
               the
               Gorge
               ,
               13.
               79.
               from
               the
               Table
               upon
               your
               Scale
               ,
               and
               set
               it
               off
               from
               1
               to
               7
               ,
               and
               from
               6
               to
               7
               ;
               and
               on
               the
               two
               points
               7
               and
               7
               ,
               raise
               perpendicular
               Lines
               ,
               as
               7
               ,
               8
               ,
               and
               7
               ,
               8.
               
            
             
               6
               Take
               off
               from
               the
               Table
               ,
               the
               length
               of
               the
               Flank
               ,
               viz.
               10.
               07.
               upon
               your
               Scale
               ,
               and
               set
               it
               off
               from
               7
               to
               8.
               
            
             
               7.
               
               Draw
               the
               Face
               from
               the
               uppermost
               part
               of
               the
               
                 Capital
                 Line
              
               d.
               to
               the
               uttermost
               part
               of
               the
               Flank
               8.
               and
               so
               for
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Lines
               ,
               they
               are
               easily
               set
               off
               ,
               and
               transferree
               from
               these
               ,
               and
               so
               the
               Draught
               is
               finished
               .
            
             
             
               Thus
               you
               may
               by
               these
               Tables
               ,
               with
               a
               Scale
               of
               equal
               parts
               ,
               delineate
               any
               regular
               Figure
               ,
               two
               several
               ways
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               first
               or
               second
               Table
               ,
               and
               by
               the
               
                 Rule
                 of
                 Three
              
               ;
               these
               Tables
               may
               serve
               for
               any
               Proportions
               .
            
             
               But
               these
               
               Data's
               may
               be
               varied
               without
               prejudice
               to
               the
               Maxims
               of
               Fortification
               ,
               and
               the
               Constitution
               of
               the
               Ground-lines
               will
               be
               various
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Experience
               and
               Opinions
               of
               several
               Engeniers
               :
               Therefore
               I
               shall
               shew
               the
               Constitution
               ,
               and
               making
               the
               principal
               
                 Ground
                 lines
              
               of
               any
               Fortification
               ,
               in
               several
               ways
               ,
               use
               by
               other
               more
               famous
               and
               modern
               Authors
               .
            
             
               And
               First
               ,
               of
               the
               Dutch
               or
               German
               ways
               ,
               who
               ,
               although
               they
               have
               filled
               the
               World
               full
               of
               Books
               ,
               of
               several
               ways
               of
               Fortification
               ,
               yet
               
                 Maralois
                 ,
                 Fritach
                 ,
                 Goldman
              
               ,
               and
               Dogen
               ,
               all
               agree
               ,
               to
               make
               the
               Courtain
               36
               Perches
               ,
               or
               432
               
                 Rhinland
                 feet
              
               ;
               the
               Face
               24
               Perches
               ,
               or
               288
               of
               the
               aforesaid
               Feet
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               proportion
               of
               the
               Curtain
               ,
               to
               the
               Face
               ,
               is
               as
               3
               to
               2.
               the
               Angle
               forming
               the
               Flank
               ,
               is
               always
               40
               Degrees
               ;
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Bulwark
               is
               half
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Figure
               ,
               increased
               with
               15
               
                 Degrees
                 ,
                 Goldman
                 ,
                 Marolois
              
               ,
               and
               Fritach
               ,
               agree
               in
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Bulwark
               ;
               but
               Dogen
               makes
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Bulwark
               ,
               equal
               to
               4
               
               of
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Figure
               ;
               so
               that
               all
               the
               
               Data's
               are
               very
               near
               the
               same
               ,
               with
               those
               the
               Author
               hath
               laid
               down
               before
               .
            
             
               For
               English
               Authors
               ,
               I
               shall
               only
               mention
               Mr.
               Norwood
               ,
               who
               in
               his
               Maxims
               differs
               very
               little
               from
               our
               Author
               ;
               the
               
                 Duich
                 Fortification
              
               being
               then
               most
               used
               .
               And
               Sir
               
                 Jonas
                 Moor
              
               ,
               who
               was
               an
               able
               Mathematician
               ,
               and
               well
               experienc'd
               in
               this
               Art
               ;
               after
               he
               had
               shewed
               the
               several
               ways
               of
               all
               Modern
               Engeniers
               ,
               sayeth
               ,
               That
               the
               interiour
               Polygon
               is
               most
               agreeable
               to
               Practice
               ,
               being
               1000.
               to
               take
               333
               Feet
               ,
               for
               the
               Capital
               200
               ,
               for
               the
               Gorge
               and
               Flank
               ,
               and
               600
               for
               the
               Courtaine
               ,
               so
               that
               he
               agrees
               with
               
                 Manassen
                 Mallet
              
               ,
               Author
               of
               
                 Travax
                 de
                 Mars
              
               ;
               and
               ,
               for
               a
               general
               Rule
               ,
               take
               ,
               saith
               he
               ,
               1
               /
               ●
               of
               the
               interior
               Polygon
               ,
               for
               the
               Capital
               1
               /
               ●
               of
               it
               ,
               for
               the
               Gorge
               and
               Flank
               ,
               where
               there
               is
               no
               second
               Flank
               ,
               and
               where
               the
               Flank
               and
               Capital
               stand
               at
               
                 Right
                 Angles
              
               .
            
             
               The
               Emperor
               ,
               Ferdinand
               III.
               sets
               down
               (
               as
               Schotus
               that
               learned
               Jesuite
               sayth
               )
               an
               Universal
               way
               to
               lay
               down
               the
               Lines
               of
               any
               Fort
               ,
               viz
               to
               divide
               the
               interiour
               Polygon
               into
               22
               parts
               ;
               of
               these
               ,
               take
               5
               for
               the
               Gorge
               ,
               8
               for
               the
               Capital
               ,
               and
               4
               for
               the
               Flank
               ;
               or
               supposing
               the
               Polygon
               to
               be
               divided
               into
               1000
               ,
               the
               Capital
               is
               363
               ,
               the
               Gorge
               227
               ,
               the
               Flank
               181
               ,
               
               this
               proportion
               is
               good
               ,
               and
               for
               such
               as
               are
               not
               well
               skilled
               in
               Trigonometry
               ,
               may
               very
               well
               be
               used
               .
            
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               Italian
               Fortifications
               .
            
             
               First
               ,
               of
               
                 Signior
                 Pietro
                 Sardi
              
               ,
               who
               makes
               the
               interior
               Polygon
               800
               
                 Venetian
                 Feet
              
               ,
               his
               Gorges
               and
               Flanks
               150
               ,
               and
               determines
               the
               Face
               of
               the
               Bastion
               ,
               by
               the
               Line
               of
               Defence
               ,
               razing
               which
               in
               a
               Square
               ,
               or
               Pentagon
               ,
               falls
               upon
               the
               10
               th
               .
               part
               of
               the
               Courtain
               ;
               in
               a
               Hexagon
               ,
               on
               the
               4
               th
               .
               part
               ;
               in
               a
               
                 Heptagon
                 ;
                 Octagon
                 ,
                 ●Enneagon
              
               ,
               on
               the
               3
               d.
               part
               ,
               in
               all
               above
               on
               the
               half
               ,
               to
               lay
               this
               down
               :
               suppose
               an
               Hexagon
               ,
               whose
               interior
               Polygon
               is
               1000
               ,
               then
               187
               will
               be
               the
               proportion
               for
               the
               Gorges
               and
               Flanks
               ,
               which
               prick
               off
               ,
               from
               4
               to
               7
               ,
               and
               from
               5
               to
               7
               ,
               and
               raising
               a
               Perpendicular
               at
               7
               ,
               set
               off
               the
               same
               distance
               ,
               from
               7
               to
               8
               ,
               for
               the
               Flanks
               ;
               then
               for
               the
               
                 Face
                 a.
                 d.
              
               divide
               the
               Courtain
               7
               ,
               7
               ,
               into
               4
               parts
               ,
               and
               set
               off
               1
               /
               ●
               from
               7
               to
               e.
               then
               lay
               a
               Ruler
               from
               e
               ,
               to
               b
               ,
               and
               draw
               
                 a
                 ,
                 b
              
               ,
               for
               the
               Face
               ;
               but
               had
               it
               been
               Square
               or
               Pentagon
               ,
               then
               7
               c.
               had
               been
               1
               /
               10
               of
               the
               Courtain
               ,
               if
               it
               had
               been
               an
               
                 Heptagon
                 ,
                 Octagon
                 ,
                 Enneagon
              
               ,
               then
               7
               ,
               e
               ,
               had
               been
               1
               /
               ●
               of
               the
               Courtain
               ,
               if
               above
               1
               /
               ●
               from
               the
               opposite
               Flank
            
             
             
               2.
               
               Tensini
               ,
               in
               small
               Forts
               above
               the
               Pentagon
               makes
               the
               Gorge
               and
               Flank
               equal
               ,
               and
               ●0th
               a
               7
               th
               .
               part
               of
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               ,
               and
               ●e
               Face
               in
               all
               Figures
               one
               3
               d.
               of
               the
               said
               ●olygon
               .
               To
               draw
               this
               :
               Suppose
               a
               Hexagon
               whose
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               5
               ,
               6.
               is
               divided
               into
               ●000
               .
               the
               Gorge
               and
               Flank
               will
               be
               as
               in
               the
               ●able
               143.
               the
               7
               th
               .
               part
               ,
               which
               set
               off
               from
               ●
               to
               7.
               and
               from
               6
               to
               7.
               and
               raising
               7
               ,
               8.
               at
               
                 Right
                 Angles
              
               ,
               set
               the
               same
               distance
               from
               7
               to
               8.
               then
               take
               1
               /
               3
               part
               of
               
                 p.
                 p.
              
               and
               setting
               one
               ●oot
               of
               the
               Compasses
               in
               8.
               cross
               the
               
                 Capital
                 Line
              
               in
               d.
               and
               draw
               8.
               d.
               which
               do
               to
               every
               Bastion
               ,
               till
               all
               be
               finished
               .
            
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               French
               Fortifications
               .
            
             
               The
               chief
               of
               these
               are
               
                 M.
                 de
                 la
                 Mont
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Manasson
                 Mallet
              
               ,
               both
               these
               divide
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               into
               5
               parts
               ,
               and
               take
               one
               for
               the
               Gorge
               ,
               and
               also
               divide
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               into
               3
               parts
               ,
               and
               take
               one
               for
               the
               
                 Capital
                 Line
              
               ;
               only
               
                 De
                 la
                 Mont
              
               takes
               ●4
               of
               the
               Courtain
               for
               the
               Flank
               ,
               and
               
                 M.
                 Mallet
              
               makes
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Flank
               and
               Courtain
               to
               be
               98
               degrees
               ,
               (
               leaving
               no
               second
               Flank
               ,
               )
               and
               so
               lays
               the
               Courtain
               more
               open
               for
               use
               ,
               and
               yet
               not
               so
               much
               as
               to
               subject
               it
               to
               ruine
               of
               the
               Besiegers
               .
            
             
             
               I
               must
               not
               forget
               
                 D.
                 Ville
              
               ,
               and
               Furneirs
               ,
               who
               divide
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               into
               6
               parts
               ,
               one
               for
               the
               Demigorge
               and
               Flank
               ,
               both
               being
               equal
               ,
               and
               at
               
                 Right
                 Angles
              
               ,
               if
               the
               
                 inferior
                 Polygon
              
               be
               1000
               ,
               the
               Gorges
               and
               Flanks
               will
               be
               166.
               
            
             
               By
               this
               Table
               following
               may
               be
               laid
               down
               any
               Fortification
               ,
               according
               to
               these
               Authors
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     Capital
                  
                   
                     Gorge
                  
                   
                     Flank
                  
                   
                     Courtain
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Fritach
                     .
                  
                   
                     400
                  
                   
                     220
                  
                   
                     200
                  
                   
                     560
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Dogen
                     .
                  
                   
                     351
                  
                   
                     167
                  
                   
                     200
                  
                   
                     666
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Emperor
                     .
                  
                   
                     363
                  
                   
                     227
                  
                   
                     181
                  
                   
                     546
                  
                
                 
                   
                     P.
                     Sardi
                     .
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     187
                  
                   
                     187
                  
                   
                     626
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Tensini
                     .
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     143
                  
                   
                     143
                  
                   
                     714
                  
                
                 
                   
                     G.
                     Maria.
                     
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     125
                  
                   
                     138
                  
                   
                     750
                  
                
                 
                   
                     De
                     la
                     mont
                     .
                  
                   
                     333
                  
                   
                     200
                  
                   
                     150
                  
                   
                     600
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Manesson
                     .
                  
                   
                     333
                  
                   
                     200
                  
                   
                     200
                  
                   
                     600
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Fren.
                     Conquest
                     .
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     200
                  
                   
                     240
                  
                   
                     600
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Furnoir
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                  
                   
                     228
                  
                   
                     166
                  
                   
                     166
                  
                   
                     666
                  
                
              
            
             
               In
               this
               Table
               you
               have
               the
               Proportions
               for
               the
               
                 Capital
                 ,
                 Gorge
                 ,
                 Flank
              
               ,
               and
               Courtain
               ,
               supposing
               the
               length
               of
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               1000
               
               English
               Feet
               ,
               according
               to
               these
               several
               .
               Authors
               But
               if
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               be
               less
               than
               a
               1000
               ,
               the
               Proportion
               in
               this
               and
               the
               former
               Tables
               may
               be
               reduced
               to
               any
               other
               Polygon
               required
               ,
               by
               multiplying
               the
               length
               given
               by
               any
               of
               those
               Numbers
               ,
               and
               cutting
               of
               the
               3
               last
               places
               .
               Example
               .
               A
               Polygon
               given
               is
               750
               ,
               what
               shall
               be
               the
               length
               of
               the
               
                 Capital
                 ,
                 Gorge
                 ,
                 Flank
              
               ,
               and
               Courtain
               ,
               according
               to
               any
               of
               the
               aforesaid
               Authors
               .
               For
               Example
               ,
               to
               
                 De
                 la
                 Mont.
              
               multiply
               750
               by
               333
               ,
               gives
               249
               Feet
               for
               the
               Capital
               ,
               so
               for
               the
               Gorge
               ,
               then
               multiply
               750
               by
               200.
               and
               there
               is
               150
               ,
               for
               the
               Gorge
               ,
               then
               multiply
               750
               by
               150
               ,
               and
               there
               will
               be
               112
               for
               the
               Flank
               ,
               and
               after
               the
               same
               manner
               450
               for
               the
               Courtain
               .
               And
               thus
               you
               may
               proportion
               any
               of
               these
               Authors
               to
               any
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               ,
               which
               must
               not
               exceed
               800
               ,
               nor
               be
               less
               than
               500
               ,
               for
               if
               less
               ,
               your
               Fort
               will
               be
               fit
               only
               for
               Cittadels
               ,
               or
               
                 Field
                 works
              
               ,
               but
               if
               more
               than
               800
               Foot
               ,
               too
               big
               for
               a
               Fort-Royal
               ,
               and
               must
               be
               well
               stored
               with
               
                 great
                 Guns
              
               .
            
             
               I
               shall
               mention
               only
               Count
               
               Pagan's
               way
               which
               was
               once
               much
               approved
               of
               here
               in
               England
               ;
               he
               was
               indeed
               a
               great
               Mathematician
               ,
               and
               well
               experienced
               by
               many
               Campagnes
               and
               Seiges
               ,
               he
               works
               by
               the
               
                 exterior
                 Polygon
              
               ,
               and
               his
               chief
               Proportions
               are
               in
               the
               following
               Table
               .
            
             
             
               
                 
                   
                     Exterior
                     Polygon
                     .
                     the
                     half
                     .
                  
                   
                     1200
                  
                   
                     1080
                  
                   
                     1000
                  
                   
                     960
                  
                   
                     820
                  
                   
                     720
                  
                   
                     600
                  
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     600
                  
                   
                     540
                  
                   
                     500
                  
                   
                     480
                  
                   
                     410
                  
                   
                     360
                  
                   
                     300
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Length
                     of
                     the
                     Courtain
                     .
                  
                   
                     425
                  
                   
                     364
                  
                   
                     334
                  
                   
                     304
                  
                   
                     375
                  
                   
                     234
                  
                   
                     164
                  
                
                 
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     212
                     1●
                  
                   
                     182
                  
                   
                     167
                  
                   
                     152
                  
                   
                     137
                     1●
                  
                   
                     117
                  
                   
                     82
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     Length
                     of
                     the
                     Perpendicular
                     .
                  
                   
                     180
                  
                   
                     180
                  
                   
                     180
                  
                   
                     180
                  
                   
                     150
                  
                   
                     144
                  
                   
                     138
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Length
                     of
                     ●he
                     Face
                     .
                  
                   
                     364
                  
                   
                     336
                  
                   
                     308
                  
                   
                     288
                  
                   
                     242
                  
                   
                     222
                  
                   
                     200
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Complem
                     .
                     of
                     the
                     Line
                     of
                     Defence
                  
                   
                     222
                  
                   
                     192
                  
                   
                      
                  
                   
                     162
                  
                   
                     162
                  
                   
                     162
                  
                   
                     90
                  
                
              
            
             
               To
               draw
               a
               Fort
               after
               this
               way
               ,
               draw
               the
               
                 exterior
                 Polygon
                 C.
                 D.
              
               divide
               it
               into
               two
               equal
               parts
               at
               E.
               which
               suppose
               600
               each
               ,
               and
               raise
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 E.
                 L.
              
               upon
               which
               set
               off
               the
               length
               of
               the
               Perpendicular
               in
               the
               
                 Table
                 ,
                 viz.
              
               180.
               which
               will
               terminate
               in
               the
               Point
               F.
               then
               from
               either
               Point
               D.
               and
               C.
               draw
               Lines
               to
               F.
               viz.
               C.
               F.
               and
               D.
               F.
               then
               look
               in
               the
               Table
               for
               the
               length
               of
               the
               
                 Face
                 ,
                 viz.
              
               364.
               which
               set
               off
               from
               C.
               to
               I.
               and
               from
               D.
               to
               K.
               then
               (
               measure
               out
               the
               length
               of
               the
               
                 Courtain
                 ,
                 viz.
              
               212
               1●
               from
               L.
               to
               H.
               and
               G.
               or
               else
               )
               take
               out
               the
               Compl.
               of
               the
               
                 Line
                 of
                 Defence
                 ,
                 viz.
              
               217.
               and
               set
               it
               off
               from
               F.
               to
               H.
               and
               from
               F.
               to
               I.
               then
               from
               H.
               and
               I.
               and
               from
               G.
               K.
               draw
               the
               Flank
               .
               Thus
               following
               the
               same
               Method
               ,
               from
               each
               Base
               or
               
                 exterior
                 Polygon
              
               ,
               you
               may
               draw
               any
               Fortification
               ;
               
               but
               to
               fortifie
               a
               Square
               ,
               the
               Proportions
               must
               be
               altered
               thus
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Base
                     or
                     exterior
                     Polygon
                  
                   
                     600
                  
                   
                     550
                  
                   
                     640
                  
                   
                     520
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Perpendicular
                  
                   
                     161
                  
                   
                     146
                  
                   
                     173
                  
                   
                     137
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Face
                  
                   
                     364
                  
                   
                     326
                  
                   
                     384
                  
                   
                     296
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Compl
                  
                   
                     222
                  
                   
                     211
                     ½
                  
                   
                     243
                     ½
                  
                   
                     211
                     ½
                  
                
              
            
             
               And
               may
               be
               drawn
               by
               the
               forementioned
               Directions
               .
            
          
           
             
               Having
               now
               set
               down
               the
               several
               ways
               for
               laying
               down
               the
               Fundamental
               Ground-line
               ,
               from
               the
               most
               considerable
               Engeniers
               of
               this
               Age.
               I
               shall
               here
               show
               how
               to
               draw
               out
               Mechanically
               ,
               in
               the
               Field
               ,
               any
               Regular
               or
               Irregular
               Fortification
               ,
               either
               from
               the
               Exterior
               or
               Interior
               Polygon
               ,
               according
               to
               Count
               Pagan
               .
            
             
               And
               first
               ,
               from
               a
               Pentagon
               to
               a
               straight
               Line
               from
               the
               
                 exterior
                 Polygon
              
               .
            
             
               The
               Base
               ,
               or
               
                 exterior
                 Polygon
                 a.
                 c.
              
               given
               ,
               divide
               as
               in
               Plate
               the
               4
               th
               .
               into
               equal
               parts
               in
               
               the
               
                 Point
                 b.
              
               from
               the
               
                 Point
                 b.
              
               raise
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 e.
                 b.
              
               of
               a
               sufficient
               length
               ,
               then
               divide
               
                 a.
                 b.
              
               the
               half
               Base
               into
               3.
               6.
               or
               9.
               equal
               parts
               ,
               and
               take
               ⅓
               thereof
               for
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 b.
                 d.
              
               so
               is
               d.
               a
               Point
               ,
               through
               which
               draw
               the
               
                 Line
                 a.
                 d.
              
               and
               
                 d.
                 c.
              
               which
               done
               ,
               divide
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 b.
                 d.
              
               into
               8
               equal
               parts
               ,
               and
               make
               
                 d.
                 h.
              
               and
               
                 d.
                 f.
              
               equal
               to
               9
               of
               those
               parts
               ,
               then
               from
               the
               points
               h.
               and
               f.
               let
               fall
               the
               
                 Perpendiculars
                 h.
                 g.
              
               and
               
                 f.
                 p.
              
               till
               they
               cut
               the
               
                 Lines
                 a.
                 f.
              
               and
               
                 c.
                 h.
              
               in
               the
               
                 Points
                 g.
              
               and
               p.
               then
               join
               the
               
                 Points
                 a.
                 g.
                 h.
              
               and
               
                 f.
                 p.
                 c.
              
               and
               so
               you
               have
               
                 a.
                 g.
              
               and
               
                 c.
                 p.
              
               for
               the
               two
               
                 Faces
                 g.
                 h.
              
               and
               
                 f.
                 p.
              
               for
               the
               two
               Flanks
               ,
               and
               
                 h.
                 f.
              
               for
               the
               Courtain
               of
               the
               
                 Fortification
                 ,
                 Plate
              
               4.
               
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
          
           
             
               From
               a
               Square
               to
               a
               Pentagon
               .
            
             
               The
               Method
               of
               this
               is
               the
               same
               as
               the
               former
               ,
               only
               instead
               of
               dividing
               the
               half
               
                 Base
                 a.
                 c.
              
               into
               3.
               6.
               or
               9.
               and
               taking
               the
               ⅓
               thereof
               for
               the
               Perpendicular
               ,
               you
               must
               here
               divide
               the
               half
               
                 Base
                 a.
                 c.
              
               into
               15
               or
               30
               lengths
               ,
               and
               set
               off
               4
               or
               8
               for
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 d.
                 b.
              
               and
               instead
               of
               dividing
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 d.
                 b.
              
               into
               8.
               you
               are
               to
               divide
               it
               into
               5
               ,
               and
               of
               these
               parts
               ,
               you
               are
               to
               set
               off
               
               7
               upon
               both
               the
               
                 Lines
                 d.
                 f.
              
               and
               
                 d.
                 h.
              
               and
               this
               is
               all
               the
               difference
               .
            
             
               Or
               note
               ,
               that
               having
               raised
               your
               Perpendicular
               ,
               take
               any
               measure
               whatsoever
               ,
               be
               it
               
                 Pole
                 ,
                 Staff
                 ,
                 Line
              
               or
               Stake
               ,
               and
               mark
               out
               3.
               6
               ,
               9.
               12.
               15.
               18.
               21.
               
               &c.
               upon
               the
               
                 Line
                 a.
                 c.
              
               to
               the
               
                 Point
                 l.
              
               upon
               which
               Point
               erect
               a
               
                 Perpendicular
                 l.
                 k.
              
               equal
               to
               ⅓
               of
               
                 a.
                 l.
              
               so
               is
               k.
               a
               visual
               Point
               ,
               through
               which
               is
               to
               be
               drawn
               the
               
                 Line
                 a.
                 f.
              
               cutting
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 c.
                 e.
              
               in
               the
               
                 Point
                 d.
              
               and
               e.
               a
               visial
               Point
               ,
               through
               which
               is
               to
               be
               drawn
               the
               
                 Line
                 c.
                 h.
              
               then
               proceed
               as
               before
               directed
               for
               the
               Pentagon
               ;
               but
               for
               the
               Square
               instead
               of
               marking
               out
               3
               lengths
               upon
               the
               half
               Base
               ,
               you
               must
               here
               mark
               out
               15
               for
               the
               
                 Line
                 a.
                 l.
              
               and
               instead
               of
               ⅓
               you
               must
               allow
               4
               of
               those
               Parts
               for
               the
               
                 Perpendicular
                 k.
                 l.
              
               
            
             
               To
               do
               this
               by
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               ,
               and
               that
               from
               the
               Square
               and
               Pentagon
               ,
               to
               a
               
                 Right
                 Line
              
               ,
               let
               the
               
                 interior
                 Polygon
              
               given
               be
               A.
               B.
               which
               divide
               into
               12
               parts
               ,
               and
               make
               
                 d.
                 e.
              
               1
               /
               12
               and
               
                 a.
                 i.
              
               2
               /
               12
               for
               a
               Square
               ,
               and
               
                 a.
                 k.
              
               ●●12
               for
               a
               
                 Pentagon
                 ,
                 p.
                 k.
                 l.
              
               and
               
                 p.
                 i.
                 g.
              
               right
               Angles
               ,
               and
               proceed
               as
               directed
               before
               ,
               Plate
               the
               4
               
                 th
                 .
                 Fig.
              
               4.
               
            
             
             
               Note
               also
               that
               the
               
                 exterior
                 Polygon
              
               should
               be
               about
               1150
               Feet
               ,
               never
               less
               than
               1024
               ,
               nor
               more
               than
               1280
               ,
               that
               so
               the
               Line
               of
               Defence
               ,
               may
               not
               be
               too
               short
               ,
               nor
               longer
               than
               Musquet-shot
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Bastion
               be
               not
               less
               than
               60
               degrees
               ;
               but
               where
               either
               the
               Scituation
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               or
               the
               old
               Walls
               or
               Rampiers
               of
               a
               Town
               will
               not
               admit
               any
               such
               equality
               either
               of
               Bases
               or
               Angles
               ,
               then
               the
               Engenier
               may
               either
               open
               or
               sharpen
               his
               Angles
               ,
               or
               lengthen
               or
               shorten
               his
               Lines
               as
               necessity
               shall
               require
               .
            
          
           
             
               Plate
               the
               5th
               .
            
             
               Here
               note
               that
               the
               Encampment
               is
               figured
               with
               Paces
               ,
               and
               the
               Profiles
               with
               Feet
               .
            
             
             
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
           
             OF
             GUNNERY
             .
          
           
             Plates
             IV.
             V.
             VI.
             VII
             .
             VIII
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               Names
               of
               the
               Principal
               Members
               of
               a
               Piece
               of
               ORDNANCE
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               Defin.
               A
               CANNON
               is
               a
               long
               round
               Body
               ,
               either
               of
               Brass
               or
               Iron
               ,
               formed
               and
               made
               hollow
               by
               Art
               ,
               and
               proportion
               ,
               to
               offend
               afar
               off
               ,
               with
               a
               Ball
               of
               Iron
               ,
               Stone
               ,
               or
               any
               artificial
               Substance
               ,
               charged
               with
               Gun-Powder
               in
               its
               charged
               Cylinder
               ,
               which
               being
               fired
               ,
               in
               an
               instant
               performs
               its
               desired
               Effect
               .
               This
               Machine
               was
               invented
               by
               an
               Englishman
               ,
               and
               first
               put
               in
               practice
               by
               the
               Venetians
               against
               the
               Genoueses
               at
               
                 Chiezza
                 ,
                 Anno
              
               1376.
               
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               superficies
               of
               the
               Metal
               ,
               is
               the
               outside
               ,
               round
               about
               the
               Piece
               .
            
             
             
               3.
               
               The
               Body
               is
               the
               substance
               of
               the
               whole
               Mass
               of
               Metal
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               Chase
               is
               the
               concavity
               of
               the
               Piece
               ,
               in
               which
               they
               put
               the
               Charge
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               Muzzle
               is
               the
               extremity
               of
               the
               Chase
               by
               which
               you
               load
               and
               unload
               the
               Piece
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               The
               Calibre
               is
               the
               Diameter
               of
               the
               Muzzel
               or
               Mouth
               .
            
             
               7.
               
               The
               Touch-hole
               is
               that
               little
               Vent
               ,
               which
               passeth
               from
               the
               
                 Convex
                 Superficies
              
               ,
               to
               the
               very
               Chamber
               of
               the
               Piece
               ,
               made
               to
               give
               fire
               to
               the
               Powder
               within
               ;
               that
               which
               encloseth
               the
               extremity
               of
               the
               Chase
               about
               the
               Touch-hole
               ,
               is
               called
               the
               Breech
               or
               Covl
               .
            
             
               8.
               
               The
               Cascabel
               is
               the
               Pammel
               at
               the
               Breech
               or
               Coyl
               .
            
             
               The
               Tunnions
               are
               pieces
               of
               Mettal
               fixed
               unto
               the
               
                 exterior
                 superficies
              
               of
               the
               Gun
               ,
               on
               which
               he
               moves
               in
               the
               Carriage
               .
            
             
               The
               Body
               of
               the
               Piece
               ,
               is
               that
               which
               is
               comprehended
               betwixt
               the
               Center
               of
               the
               Tunnions
               and
               the
               Cascable
               .
            
             
               The
               vacant
               Cylinder
               is
               comprehended
               betwixt
               the
               Center
               of
               the
               Tunnions
               and
               the
               Muzzel
               .
            
             
               The
               Frees
               or
               Muzzel-Ring
               ,
               is
               that
               thick
               Cornish
               which
               incompasseth
               the
               
                 Convex
                 Superficies
              
               ,
               or
               the
               Piece
               .
            
             
               The
               Dispart
               Line
               of
               the
               Piece
               ,
               is
               the
               difference
               betwixt
               the
               Semi-diameter
               of
               the
               Muzzel
               and
               Base
               Ring
               .
            
             
               The
               Vent
               of
               the
               Piece
               is
               the
               difference
               betwixt
               the
               Diameter
               of
               the
               Shot
               ,
               and
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Piece
               .
            
             
               The
               Chamber
               ,
               or
               charged
               Cylinder
               ,
               is
               that
               part
               of
               the
               Chase
               towards
               the
               Touch-hole
               equally
               large
               ,
               
               nor
               narrower
               in
               one
               place
               than
               in
               another
               ,
               and
               doth
               contain
               the
               Powder
               and
               Ball.
               
            
          
           
             
               How
               to
               know
               the
               different
               Fortification
               of
               a
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               .
            
             
               In
               fortifying
               any
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               ,
               there
               are
               three
               degrees
               observed
               ,
               as
               first
               ,
               
                 Legitimate
                 Pieces
              
               ,
               which
               are
               those
               that
               are
               ordinarily
               fortified
               ;
               secondly
               ,
               
                 Bastard
                 Pieces
              
               ,
               Which
               are
               such
               whose
               Fortification
               is
               lessened
               ;
               thirdly
               ,
               
                 Double
                 fortified
                 Pieces
              
               ,
               or
               extraordinary
               Pieces
               .
            
             
               The
               Fortification
               of
               any
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               is
               accounted
               by
               the
               thickness
               of
               the
               Metal
               at
               the
               
                 Touch-hole
                 ,
                 Trunnions
              
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               Muzzel
               ,
               in
               proportion
               to
               the
               Diameter
               of
               the
               Bo●e
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Legitimate
                 Pieces
              
               ,
               or
               the
               ordinary
               fortified
               Cannons
               have
               7
               /
               8
               at
               the
               Touch-hole
               ,
               5
               /
               8
               at
               the
               Trunnions
               ,
               and
               3
               /
               8
               at
               the
               Muzzel
               ,
               of
               the
               thickness
               of
               the
               Bore
               ,
               in
               thickness
               of
               the
               Metal
               .
               Bastard
               Cannons
               or
               lessened
               Cannons
               have
               ¾
               at
               their
               Touch-hole
               ,
               or
               12
               /
               105
               and
               9
               /
               16
               at
               their
               Trunnions
               ,
               and
               at
               their
               Muzzel
               :
               The
               
                 Double
                 fortified
                 Cannons
              
               have
               full
               one
               Diameter
               of
               the
               Bore
               in
               thickness
               of
               the
               Metal
               at
               the
               Touch-hole
               ,
               and
               11
               /
               16
               at
               the
               Trunnions
               ,
               and
               7
               /
               16
               at
               their
               Muzzel
               .
               Now
               all
               double
               fortified
               
                 Culverins
                 ,
                 &c.
              
               are
               1
               1
               /
               8
               at
               the
               Touch-hole
               ,
               15
               /
               16
               at
               the
               Trunnions
               ,
               and
               9
               /
               16
               at
               the
               Muzzel
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Ordinary
                 fortified
                 Culverins
              
               ,
               are
               fortified
               every
               way
               as
               double
               
                 fortified
                 Cannons
              
               ,
               and
               lessened
               Culverins
               as
               
                 Ordinary
                 Cannons
              
               in
               all
               respect
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               How
               to
               know
               how
               much
               Powder
               is
               fit
               for
               Proof
               ,
               and
               what
               for
               Service
               for
               any
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               .
            
             
               For
               Cannon
               take
               ⅘
               of
               the
               weight
               of
               their
               Iron
               Bullet
               of
               good
               Corn
               Powder
               for
               Proof
               ,
               and
               for
               Service
               ½
               the
               weight
               of
               the
               Iron
               Bullet
               is
               sufficient
               ,
               especially
               for
               Iron
               Ordnance
               ,
               which
               will
               not
               endure
               so
               much
               Pow●●r
               ,
               as
               Brass
               ones
               will
               receive
               by
               ¼
               in
               weight
               .
               For
               Culverins
               allow
               the
               whole
               weight
               of
               the
               Shot
               for
               Proof
               ,
               and
               ⅔
               for
               Service
               .
               For
               Sakers
               and
               Falcons
               take
               ⅘
               of
               the
               weight
               of
               the
               Shot
               ,
               and
               for
               lesser
               Pieces
               the
               whole
               Weight
               may
               be
               used
               in
               Service
               ,
               until
               they
               grow
               hot
               ;
               but
               then
               there
               must
               be
               some
               abatement
               made
               at
               discretion
               ,
               and
               take
               113
               of
               the
               Weight
               of
               their
               Iron
               Bullet
               for
               Proof
               .
            
          
           
             
               To
               know
               what
               Bullet
               is
               fit
               to
               be
               used
               in
               any
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               .
            
             
               The
               Bullet
               must
               be
               somewhat
               less
               than
               the
               Bore
               of
               the
               Gun
               ,
               that
               so
               it
               may
               have
               vent
               in
               the
               Discharge
               :
               so
               Authors
               affirm
               ,
               that
               ¼
               of
               an
               Inch
               less
               than
               the
               Bore
               ,
               will
               serve
               all
               Ordnance
               ;
               but
               this
               vent
               is
               too
               much
               for
               a
               Falcon
               ,
               &c.
               and
               too
               little
               for
               a
               Cannon
               ;
               therefore
               I
               approve
               them
               not
               ,
               but
               commend
               Mr.
               Phillips's
               proportion
               (
               set
               down
               in
               his
               
                 Mathematical
                 Manual
              
               ,
               page
               165
               )
               to
               your
               Use
               ,
               which
               is
               to
               divide
               the
               Bore
               of
               the
               Gun
               into
               20
               equal
               parts
               ,
               and
               let
               the
               Diameter
               of
               the
               Bullet
               be
               19
               /
               30
               thereof
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Of
               the
               Qualification
               of
               an
               able
               Gunner
               ,
               and
               necessary
               Operations
               before
               Shooting
               ,
               and
               in
               Shooting
               .
            
             
               A
               Gunner
               ought
               to
               be
               a
               Man
               of
               Courage
               ,
               Experience
               ,
               and
               Vigilant
               ;
               he
               ought
               to
               have
               good
               skill
               in
               Arithmetick
               ,
               to
               know
               the
               extraction
               of
               the
               Roots
               ,
               &c.
               
               He
               ought
               to
               have
               skill
               in
               Geometry
               ,
               to
               take
               heights
               ,
               distances
               ,
               &c.
               to
               know
               the
               Divisions
               and
               use
               of
               his
               
                 Circle
                 ,
                 Quadrant
              
               ,
               and
               Quadret
               ;
               to
               know
               how
               to
               level
               and
               to
               lay
               Platforms
               ,
               and
               to
               raise
               Batteries
               .
               He
               must
               know
               the
               Names
               of
               all
               sorts
               of
               Ordnance
               ,
               their
               Weight
               ,
               the
               Height
               of
               the
               Bore
               ,
               the
               height
               and
               weight
               of
               their
               Shot
               ,
               the
               length
               and
               breadth
               of
               their
               Ladles
               ,
               how
               much
               Powder
               to
               use
               for
               Proof
               and
               Action
               ;
               the
               Shots
               Level
               ,
               and
               the
               Shots
               Random
               ;
               He
               must
               know
               the
               Names
               of
               all
               the
               Members
               of
               a
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               ;
               he
               must
               also
               know
               the
               length
               ,
               thickness
               and
               breadth
               of
               all
               manner
               of
               Carriages
               ,
               and
               must
               know
               all
               the
               parts
               thereof
               ,
               viz.
               the
               Cheeks
               or
               Sides
               ,
               the
               
                 Axtree
                 ,
                 Spokes
                 ,
                 Nave
                 ,
                 Hoops
                 ,
                 Transomes
                 ,
                 Bolts
                 ,
                 Plates
                 ,
                 Drawing-Hooks
                 ,
              
               the
               Clout
               ,
               the
               Hole
               for
               the
               Linspin
               ,
               the
               Shafts
               ,
               the
               Thill
               and
               Thill-Bolt
               ,
               the
               Forelock
               and
               
                 Forelock
                 Keys
                 ,
                 Cap-squares
              
               ,
               the
               
                 Forelock
                 pins
              
               and
               Chain
               ,
               the
               Pintle
               and
               
                 Bolt-hole
                 ,
                 Fellows
                 ,
                 Nails
                 ,
                 Fellow-bars
                 ,
                 Stirrups
                 ,
              
               the
               Ruts
               of
               the
               
                 Wheel
                 ,
                 Dowledges
                 ,
                 Bed
                 ,
                 Conies
                 ,
                 Leveres
                 ,
                 Handscrews
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               He
               must
               also
               know
               how
               to
               make
               his
               
                 Ladles
                 ,
                 Spunges
                 ,
                 Cartridges
              
               ,
               whether
               of
               
                 Paper
                 ,
                 Vellum
              
               ,
               or
               Canvass
               ,
               and
               to
               have
               by
               him
               Farmeres
               of
               all
               sorts
               ,
               Sheep-skins
               undrest
               to
               make
               
                 Spunges
                 ,
                 Powder
                 ,
                 Shot
                 ,
                 Needles
                 ,
                 
                 Thread
                 ,
                 Paste
              
               and
               
                 Starch
                 ,
                 Marlin
                 ,
                 Twine
                 ,
                 Nails
                 ,
                 Handspikes
                 ,
                 Crows
                 of
                 Iron
                 ,
                 Granado-shells
                 ,
              
               and
               Materials
               for
               
                 Composition
                 ,
                 Fasces
                 ,
                 Budg-Barrels
                 ,
                 Cannon-Baskets
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               These
               being
               general
               things
               he
               is
               to
               know
               ,
               and
               at
               all
               times
               to
               have
               ready
               by
               him
               ,
               and
               he
               is
               more
               particularly
               to
               know
               these
               following
               parts
               of
               his
               Art
               ,
               as
               ,
            
          
           
             
               How
               to
               Tertiate
               ,
               Quadrate
               ,
               and
               to
               Dispart
               a
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               To
               Tertiate
               a
               Piece
               ,
               is
               to
               find
               whether
               it
               hath
               its
               due
               thickness
               at
               the
               
                 Trunnions
                 ,
                 Touch
                 hole
              
               and
               Neck
               ,
               and
               if
               the
               
                 Trunnions
                 ,
                 Touch-hole
              
               and
               Neck
               are
               in
               its
               due
               order
               ,
               and
               the
               Chase
               streight
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               To
               Quadrate
               a
               Piece
               mounted
               ,
               is
               to
               see
               whether
               it
               be
               directly
               placed
               ,
               and
               equally
               poized
               in
               the
               Carriage
               ;
               which
               is
               known
               by
               finding
               in
               the
               
                 Convex
                 Superficies
              
               of
               the
               Base
               and
               Muzzel-Ring
               ,
               the
               Point
               which
               is
               Perpendicular
               ,
               over
               the
               Soul
               of
               the
               Piece
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               found
               by
               the
               Gunners
               Instrument
               ,
               called
               a
               Level
               ;
               an
               Instrument
               whose
               use
               is
               so
               vulgarly
               known
               ,
               that
               it
               needeth
               not
               my
               Explanation
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               To
               Dispart
               a
               Piece
               ,
               is
               to
               fix
               ,
               or
               elevate
               on
               the
               Convex-point
               of
               the
               Muzzel-Ring
               ,
               a
               Mark
               as
               far
               distant
               from
               the
               Cylinder
               ,
               or
               Soul
               of
               the
               Piece
               ,
               as
               is
               the
               Point
               of
               the
               Base-Ring
               ;
               to
               the
               end
               ,
               that
               the
               Visail-ray
               which
               passeth
               by
               these
               Marks
               ,
               may
               be
               parallel
               to
               the
               Chase
               ,
               Soul
               or
               Cylinder
               of
               the
               Piece
               .
               Now
               the
               
                 Dispart
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
              
               the
               difference
               of
               the
               Semidiameters
               of
               the
               Cornishes
               ,
               may
               be
               by
               a
               pair
               of
               
                 Calliper
                 Compasses
              
               attained
               ,
               which
               found
               ,
               place
               on
               the
               top
               of
               the
               
                 Cornish
                 Ring
              
               ,
               near
               the
               Muzzel
               ,
               over
               the
               middle
               of
               the
               
                 Inferior
                 Cylinder
              
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               To
               know
               how
               far
               any
               Piece
               of
               Ordnance
               will
               shoot
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               As
               to
               the
               several
               shootings
               in
               Artillery
               ,
               Authors
               differ
               much
               in
               their
               Judgments
               and
               Opinions
               ,
               but
               they
               all
               unanimously
               agree
               ,
               that
               the
               Ball
               being
               shot
               forth
               ,
               flies
               through
               the
               Air
               ,
               with
               a
               Violent
               ,
               Mixt
               and
               Natural
               Motion
               ;
               describing
               a
               
                 Parabolical
                 line
              
               ,
               in
               whose
               beginning
               and
               ending
               ,
               are
               lines
               sensibly
               streight
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               middle
               curved
               ;
               In
               the
               beginuing
               the
               imprest
               force
               driving
               forward
               by
               the
               Fire
               ,
               the
               natural
               gravity
               of
               the
               Ball
               doth
               describe
               a
               
                 Right
                 Line
              
               ,
               called
               the
               
                 Direct
                 Line
              
               ,
               or
               Ranges
               of
               the
               Balls
               Circuit
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               middle
               that
               force
               diminisheth
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Natural
                 Gravity
              
               prevaileth
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               describeth
               a
               curved
               line
               ,
               called
               the
               
                 Balls
                 middle
                 Helical
              
               or
               
                 Conical
                 Arch
              
               ;
               In
               the
               end
               ,
               the
               
                 Natural
                 Gravity
              
               overcoming
               the
               imprest
               violence
               ,
               (
               which
               becomes
               altogether
               weak
               and
               faint
               )
               describes
               a
               new
               right
               line
               ,
               called
               
                 the
                 Balls
                 declining
                 line
              
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Ball
               tends
               towards
               the
               Center
               of
               the
               Earth
               ,
               as
               towards
               a
               Place
               natural
               unto
               all
               heavy
               bodies
               .
               See
               Figure
               92.
               
               These
               motions
               are
               somewhat
               longer
               ,
               according
               as
               the
               Piece
               is
               mounted
               from
               the
               Level
               unto
               the
               Angle
               of
               45
               deg
               .
               which
               is
               called
               
                 the
                 Vtmost
                 Random
              
               .
               The
               Elevation
               of
               which
               ,
               is
               regulated
               by
               the
               
               Gunner's
               Quadrant
               ,
               the
               use
               of
               which
               Instrument
               is
               so
               generally
               known
               ,
               and
               by
               so
               many
               Authors
               ,
               fully
               explained
               ,
               that
               I
               here
               crave
               leave
               to
               omit
               it
               .
               But
               take
               these
               for
               general
               Rules
               .
            
             
             
               1.
               
               That
               a
               Shot
               at
               Right
               Angle
               ,
               strikes
               more
               violent
               and
               furiously
               than
               at
               Oblique
               Angles
               ;
               therefore
               Gunners
               use
               when
               they
               are
               to
               batter
               down
               a
               Tower
               ,
               Wall
               ,
               or
               Earth-work
               ,
               to
               shoot
               point
               blank
               at
               the
               object
               ,
               Tire
               by
               Tire
               ;
               by
               discharging
               all
               the
               Pieces
               in
               Battery
               against
               the
               self
               same
               object
               ,
               in
               the
               same
               instant
               ,
               
                 holding
                 it
                 for
                 a
                 Maxim
              
               ,
               that
               ten
               Cannons
               discharged
               together
               ,
               do
               far
               more
               Execution
               ,
               than
               discharged
               one
               after
               another
               .
               Now
               at
               
                 Oblique
                 Angles
              
               they
               shoot
               either
               Cross-ways
               ,
               or
               by
               rebounding
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               That
               the
               speediest
               way
               to
               make
               a
               Breach
               in
               a
               Wall
               ,
               &c.
               
               Is
               by
               shooting
               at
               the
               Object
               from
               two
               Batteries
               ,
               which
               ruins
               far
               more
               speedily
               than
               by
               striking
               the
               Object
               with
               one
               Battery
               at
               
                 Right
                 Angles
              
               ,
               although
               that
               one
               Battery
               hath
               as
               many
               Cannon
               as
               the
               other
               
                 two
                 hath
              
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               That
               if
               you
               were
               to
               Batter
               a
               flank
               covered
               with
               an
               Orillion
               ,
               (
               which
               because
               you
               cannot
               possibly
               Batter
               it
               right
               forward
               )
               you
               must
               therefore
               of
               necessity
               batter
               it
               obliquely
               ,
               by
               way
               of
               Rebounding
               ,
               thus
               :
               
                 Chuse
                 a
                 fit
                 place
                 in
                 the
              
               Courtain
               
                 to
                 be
                 your
              
               object
               ,
               
                 on
                 which
                 you
                 may
                 play
                 with
                 your
                 Battery
                 obliquely
                 ,
                 so
                 that
                 by
                 a
                 rebound
                 the
                 shot
                 may
                 leap
                 into
                 the
              
               flanks
               ,
               
                 holding
                 for
                 a
              
               Maxim
               ,
               
                 in
                 this
                 operation
              
               ,
               That
               the
               Angles
               of
               Incidence
               and
               Reflection
               are
               equal
               .
            
          
           
             
               Of
               shooting
               in
               Mortar-Pieces
               .
            
             
               A
               Mortar-Piece
               is
               a
               short
               Piece
               ,
               with
               which
               they
               shoot
               
                 Bombs
                 ,
                 Granado-shells
                 ,
                 Stone-Balls
                 &c.
              
               not
               by
               a
               Right
               Line
               ,
               but
               from
               a
               Curved
               ,
               from
               on
               high
               ,
               so
               that
               it
               may
               fall
               where
               it
               should
               ,
               be
               desired
               :
               Now
               this
               Mortar
               is
               placed
               in
               the
               Carriage
               ,
               〈…〉
            
             
             
               Bombs
               are
               great
               hollow
               Balls
               of
               Iron
               or
               Brass
               ,
               in
               which
               are
               put
               fine
               sifted
               Gunpowder
               ,
               which
               by
               a
               Fuse
               ,
               they
               proportion
               to
               them
               a
               due
               Fire
               ,
               that
               so
               they
               may
               break
               assoon
               as
               they
               fall
               amongst
               the
               Enemies
               .
               These
               Fusees
               are
               small
               Trunks
               of
               
                 Wood
                 ,
                 Tin
              
               or
               Iron
               ,
               filled
               with
               a
               
                 prepared
                 Composition
              
               for
               that
               purpose
               .
               Granadoes
               are
               of
               the
               same
               form
               with
               Bombs
               ,
               only
               smaller
               ,
               and
               are
               many
               times
               cast
               by
               hand
               ,
               and
               are
               made
               of
               
                 Iron
                 ,
                 Brass
                 ,
                 Glass
              
               or
               Earth
               .
               Now
               in
               order
               to
               the
               well
               shooting
               in
               those
               kind
               of
               Machines
               called
               Mortars
               ,
               't
               is
               requisite
               to
               observe
               these
               following
               Rules
               :
               as
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   That
                   before
                   you
                   make
                   a
                   Shot
                   at
                   any
                   place
                   ,
                   you
                   find
                   the
                   distance
                   thereof
                   from
                   your
                   Mortar
                   .
                
                 
                   2.
                   
                   That
                   the
                   Bombs
                   or
                   other
                   Bodies
                   that
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   shot
                   ,
                   be
                   of
                   equal
                   weight
                   ,
                   otherwise
                   the
                   Shots
                   will
                   fail
                   .
                
                 
                   3.
                   
                   That
                   the
                   Carriage
                   in
                   breadth
                   be
                   always
                   on
                   a
                   Level
                   ,
                   and
                   without
                   any
                   descent
                   ,
                   that
                   so
                   it
                   may
                   not
                   leap
                   in
                   discharging
                   fail
                   .
                
                 
                   4.
                   
                   That
                   the
                   Powder
                   with
                   which
                   the
                   Mortar
                   is
                   loaded
                   be
                   always
                   of
                   the
                   same
                   force
                   and
                   weight
                   .
                
                 
                   5.
                   
                   That
                   the
                   charge
                   of
                   the
                   Mortar
                   ,
                   as
                   well
                   in
                   Powder
                   ,
                   as
                   in
                   Wadding
                   ,
                   be
                   always
                   rammed
                   in
                   with
                   blows
                   equally
                   heavy
                   ,
                   and
                   of
                   equal
                   number
                   .
                
                 
                   6.
                   
                   That
                   the
                   Wadds
                   be
                   always
                   either
                   of
                   Wood
                   or
                   Tompeons
                   ,
                   or
                   else
                   of
                   Oakam
                   ,
                   for
                   the
                   strongest
                   drives
                   it
                   farthest
                   .
                
                 
                   7.
                   
                   That
                   the
                   Fusees
                   be
                   newly
                   made
                   ,
                   in
                   those
                   days
                   that
                   they
                   are
                   to
                   be
                   used
                   ,
                   and
                   that
                   they
                   be
                   made
                   of
                   a
                   Composition
                   proportionable
                   to
                   the
                   Range
                   that
                   the
                   Shot
                   shall
                   make
                   in
                   the
                   Air
                   ,
                   so
                   that
                   the
                   Bomb
                   may
                   break
                   in
                   the
                   very
                   moment
                   it
                   falls
                   ;
                   which
                   Composition
                   must
                   be
                   such
                   ,
                   that
                   though
                   it
                   fall
                   in
                   the
                   Water
                   ,
                   yet
                   
                   not
                   to
                   extinguish
                   ,
                   but
                   the
                   Bomb
                   there
                   to
                   break
                   .
                
              
            
             
               Now
               before
               we
               proceed
               any
               farther
               ,
               I
               think
               it
               necessary
               ,
               to
               shew
               how
               to
               compose
               your
               Ingredients
               for
               your
               Fusee
               .
            
          
           
             
               To
               make
               Fuses
               for
               Bombs
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               
                 The
                 Composition
                 for
                 .
                 Bombs
                 must
                 be
                 of
                 a
                 slow
                 motion
                 ,
                 that
                 so
                 time
                 enough
                 may
                 be
                 given
                 to
                 throw
                 either
              
               Bombs
               ,
               Granadoes
               ,
               Fire-Balls
               ,
               Thundring
               Barrels
               ,
               &c.
               
               
                 They
                 are
                 compounded
                 of
                 these
                 Ingredients
                 ,
                 thus
                 :
              
               Take
               a
               pound
               of
               Gunpowder
               ,
               416
               of
               Sulphur
               ,
               416
               of
               Saltpeter
               ,
               well
               beaten
               ,
               dry
               and
               sifted
               separately
               ,
               then
               mix
               it
               and
               make
               up
               your
               Fuse
               hereof
               .
               Or
               ,
               Take
               Powder
               of
               Benjamin
               and
               small-Coles
               ,
               all
               well
               beaten
               and
               mixed
               together
               with
               some
               
                 Oil
                 of
                 Piter
              
               ,
               and
               so
               fill
               the
               Fusee
               therewith
               .
            
             
               Now
               the
               use
               of
               Mortar-Pieces
               ,
               being
               for
               the
               most
               part
               to
               shoot
               up
               at
               Random
               ,
               therefore
               the
               Randoms
               of
               these
               Pieces
               is
               very
               necessary
               to
               be
               known
               .
               Therefore
               I
               have
               hereunto
               annexed
               a
               
                 Table
                 of
                 Randoms
              
               for
               the
               twelve
               Points
               of
               the
               Quadrant
               ,
               calculated
               by
               
                 Diego
                 Vffano
                 Zutphen
              
               ,
               and
               to
               be
               found
               in
               his
               Works
               ,
               printed
               1621.
               
            
             
             
               
                 
                   A
                   Table
                   of
                   Randoms
                   for
                   Mortar-Pieces
                   ,
                   to
                   the
                   twelve
                   Points
                   of
                   the
                   Gunners
                   Quadrant
                   ,
                   calculated
                   by
                   Diego
                   Uffano
                   Zutphen
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     583
                  
                   
                     570
                  
                   
                     534
                  
                   
                     468
                  
                   
                     377
                  
                   
                     248
                  
                   
                     100
                  
                
                 
                   
                     6
                  
                   
                     5
                  
                   
                     4
                  
                   
                     3
                  
                   
                     2
                  
                   
                     1
                  
                   
                     0
                  
                
                 
                   
                     .
                  
                   
                     .
                  
                   
                     .
                  
                   
                     .
                  
                   
                     .
                  
                   
                     .
                  
                   
                     .
                     ☉
                  
                
                 
                   
                     6
                  
                   
                     7
                  
                   
                     8
                  
                   
                     9
                  
                   
                     10
                  
                   
                     11
                  
                   
                     12
                  
                
                 
                   
                     583
                  
                   
                     570
                  
                   
                     534
                  
                   
                     468
                  
                   
                     377
                  
                   
                     248
                  
                   
                     000
                  
                
              
            
             
               Now
               suppose
               the
               Mortar
               to
               be
               placed
               at
               ☉
               ,
               the
               Pricks
               in
               the
               middle
               line
               representeth
               the
               several
               Randoms
               ,
               numbred
               with
               the
               Degrees
               of
               the
               Quadrant
               ,
               forward
               and
               backward
               ,
               unto
               which
               the
               several
               Randoms
               ,
               are
               set
               ;
               so
               you
               see
               that
               the
               Mortar
               being
               levelled
               point
               blank
               ,
               throweth
               the
               Bomb
               100
               Paces
               ,
               if
               the
               Mortar
               be
               mounted
               one
               Point
               ,
               it
               throws
               the
               Bomb
               248
               Paces
               ,
               &c.
               until
               't
               is
               monnted
               to
               the
               6
               th
               .
               Point
               ,
               583
               Paces
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               utmost
               Random
               .
               Now
               if
               the
               Mortar
               be
               mounted
               higher
               to
               7
               ,
               8
               ,
               9.
               &c.
               
               Points
               ,
               the
               Randoms
               decrease
               again
               ,
               as
               before
               they
               did
               increase
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               in
               the
               Table
               .
            
             
               But
               in
               th●se
               latter
               Randoms
               there
               lieth
               a
               great
               mistake
               ,
               as
               shall
               be
               made
               appear
               .
               For
               if
               as
               they
               are
               distant
               from
               the
               sixth
               Point
               ,
               you
               make
               them
               equal
               unto
               one
               another
               ,
               then
               the
               Random
               of
               the
               0
               Point
               ,
               or
               the
               
                 Level
                 Random
              
               ,
               which
               is
               100
               Paces
               from
               the
               Mortar
               .
               Now
               it
               is
               contrary
               to
               all
               Art
               and
               Reason
               to
               think
               that
               if
               the
               Mortar
               be
               elevated
               to
               the
               12
               
                 th
                 .
                 Point
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
              
               bolt
               upright
               ,
               it
               should
               shoot
               the
               Bomb
               100
               Paces
               from
               the
               Mortar
               ;
               no
               ,
               it
               cannot
               be
               ,
               but
               according
               to
               all
               Reason
               ,
               the
               Bomb
               must
               fall
               down
               either
               on
               .
               or
               near
               the
               Mortar
               ,
               and
               not
               100
               Paces
               distant
               ,
               as
               is
               most
               erroniously
               conceived
               .
            
             
               The
               foregoing
               Rules
               and
               Precepts
               are
               necessary
               to
               be
               known
               by
               every
               Gunner
               ,
               who
               intends
               to
               be
               serviceable
               to
               his
               
                 Prince
                 and
                 Country
              
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
           
             The
             Exercise
             of
             the
             Foot-Granadeer's
             ,
             and
             Explanation
             ,
             beginning
             with
             the
             Fire-Lock
             .
          
           
             
               OBSERVATION
               .
            
             
               OBserve
               that
               Granadeers
               standing
               in
               a
               Body
               with
               Musketeers
               ,
               must
               make
               only
               the
               same
               Motions
               as
               they
               do
               ,
               because
               they
               meddle
               not
               with
               their
               Granades
               ,
               or
               Bayonets
               .
               The
               Facings
               are
               here
               omitted
               ,
               being
               the
               same
               with
               the
               Musketeers
               .
            
          
           
             
               Granadeers
               take
               heed
               to
               Exercise
               your
               Fire-Locks
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 JOyn
                 your
                 right
                 hand
                 to
                 your
                 Fire-locks
                 :
              
               as
               in
               the
               Exercise
               of
               the
               Musket
               .
               2.
               
               
                 Poise
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               3.
               
               
                 Rest
                 your
                 Fire
                 locks
              
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               4.
               
               
                 Cock
                 your
                 Fire-locks
                 ,
                 Guarding
                 at
                 the
                 same
                 time
                 :
              
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               5.
               
               Present
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               6.
               
               Fire
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               7.
               
               
                 Recover
                 your
                 Arms
              
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               8.
               
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Slings
              
               :
               With
               both
               hands
               turn
               the
               Fire-lock
               ,
               the
               lock
               outwards
               ,
               holding
               it
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               before
               your
               body
               ,
               the
               Thumb
               upwards
               ,
               draw
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               your
               Sling
               quickly
               in
               an
               equal
               line
               ,
               with
               your
               Fire-lock
               to
               the
               left
               side
               ,
               the
               
               Thumb
               upwards
               ,
               standing
               thus
               till
               the
               next
               Command
               .
               9.
               
               
                 Sling
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               Bring
               your
               Sling
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               just
               above
               your
               right
               shoulder
               ,
               at
               the
               same
               time
               bring
               your
               Fire-lock
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               under
               your
               left
               elbow
               ,
               bring
               the
               Sling
               over
               your
               head
               ,
               draw
               the
               Sling
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               in
               letting
               loose
               the
               right
               ,
               that
               the
               Fire-lock
               hang
               upon
               your
               right
               shoulder
               ,
               with
               the
               muzzel
               up
               ,
               and
               the
               butt
               end
               downwards
               ;
               then
               let
               loose
               your
               left
               ,
               and
               let
               it
               hang
               down
               as
               the
               right
               hand
               .
               10.
               
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Matches
              
               :
               Bring
               both
               hands
               readily
               with
               half
               outstretched
               Arms
               before
               your
               Body
               ,
               about
               the
               height
               of
               your
               shoulder
               ,
               at
               the
               same
               time
               ,
               take
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               the
               lowest
               end
               of
               the
               march
               ,
               your
               thumb
               under
               ,
               and
               the
               two
               foremost
               Fingers
               above
               ,
               then
               bring
               it
               over
               the
               back
               of
               your
               hand
               between
               your
               thumb
               and
               your
               two
               fore-fingers
               ,
               then
               thrust
               out
               the
               left
               hand
               with
               the
               match
               quickly
               forwards
               ,
               letting
               at
               the
               same
               time
               the
               right
               hand
               hang
               down
               upon
               the
               bag
               .
               11.
               
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Granades
              
               :
               Keep
               your
               left
               hand
               as
               before
               ,
               nimbly
               facing
               on
               the
               left
               foot
               to
               the
               right
               ,
               at
               the
               same
               time
               lifting
               up
               the
               cover
               of
               the
               Granade
               Pouch
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               take
               the
               Granade
               and
               bring
               it
               with
               an
               out
               stretched
               arm
               ,
               in
               a
               straight
               line
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               your
               thumb
               against
               the
               Fuse
               ,
               standing
               in
               the
               same
               Posture
               .
               12.
               
               
                 Open
                 your
                 Fuse
              
               :
               Hold
               your
               left
               hand
               still
               ,
               bringing
               the
               Granade
               to
               your
               
               mouth
               with
               your
               right
               ,
               open
               the
               Fuse
               with
               your
               teeth
               ,
               and
               thrust
               it
               nimbly
               from
               you
               to
               its
               former
               place
               .
               13.
               
               
                 Guard
                 the
                 Fuse
                 with
                 your
                 Thumb
                 .
              
               14.
               
               
                 Blow
                 your
                 Matches
              
               :
               Bring
               up
               the
               Match
               before
               your
               mouth
               ,
               blow
               it
               off
               hard
               and
               quick
               ,
               and
               thrust
               it
               at
               the
               same
               time
               to
               its
               former
               place
               .
               15.
               
               
                 Fire
                 and
                 Deliver
                 your
                 Granades
              
               :
               With
               the
               left
               hand
               meet
               the
               Granade
               a
               little
               downwards
               towards
               the
               right
               side
               ,
               unconstrained
               ,
               to
               which
               side
               your
               face
               and
               body
               must
               be
               a
               little
               turned
               ,
               fire
               the
               Fuse
               ,
               bringing
               back
               the
               right
               hand
               a
               little
               ,
               with
               the
               Granade
               ,
               deliver
               it
               with
               a
               stiff
               arm
               ,
               stepping
               forward
               with
               the
               right
               foot
               equal
               with
               the
               left
               ,
               bringing
               down
               the
               left
               hand
               with
               the
               match
               to
               the
               former
               place
               ,
               letting
               the
               right
               hand
               hang
               down
               by
               the
               Pouch
               ,
               so
               continuing
               till
               the
               next
               Command
               .
               16.
               
               
                 Return
                 your
                 Matches
              
               :
               Bring
               both
               your
               hands
               before
               your
               body
               ,
               as
               in
               Explanation
               10.
               
               Take
               the
               match
               ,
               put
               it
               in
               its
               place
               ,
               then
               let
               both
               hands
               hang
               down
               by
               your
               body
               .
               17.
               
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Slings
              
               :
               Take
               hold
               of
               the
               midst
               of
               the
               Sling
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               left
               about
               a
               hands
               breadth
               ,
               from
               the
               Fire
               lock
               below
               ,
               lift
               up
               the
               Fire-lock
               with
               the
               left
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               elbow
               comes
               through
               under
               the
               Fire-lock
               ,
               lying
               on
               the
               arm
               and
               shoulder
               ;
               let
               go
               the
               left
               from
               the
               Sling
               ,
               and
               take
               hold
               of
               your
               Fire-lock
               about
               a
               hands
               breadth
               above
               the
               lock
               ,
               let
               the
               stock
               come
               to
               lie
               between
               the
               thumb
               and
               the
               two
               foremost
               fingers
               ,
               
               your
               arms
               stretched
               with
               the
               butt
               ▪
               end
               before
               you
               .
               18.
               
               
                 Poise
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               With
               the
               right
               hand
               bring
               the
               Sling
               over
               your
               head
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               left
               your
               Fire-lock
               ,
               and
               with
               half
               stretched
               arms
               mount
               it
               ,
               the
               barrel
               turned
               forwards
               ,
               let
               go
               your
               right
               hand
               from
               the
               Sling
               ,
               turn
               your
               Fire-lock
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               that
               the
               lock
               come
               outwards
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               same
               time
               put
               your
               right
               hand
               under
               the
               cock
               ,
               the
               thumb
               upwards
               ,
               then
               thrust
               the
               Fire-lock
               quickly
               from
               you
               ,
               let
               go
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               and
               observe
               that
               your
               right
               hand
               be
               equal
               with
               your
               shoulder
               .
               19.
               
               
                 Cast
                 about
                 to
                 Charge
              
               :
               Take
               the
               Fire
               lock
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               a
               hands
               breadth
               from
               the
               lock
               ,
               the
               thumb
               upwards
               ,
               turn
               it
               about
               that
               the
               barrel
               come
               outwards
               and
               proceed
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               musket
               .
               20.
               
               
                 Draw
                 forth
                 your
                 Bayonets
              
               ?
               Take
               your
               Bayonet
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               draw
               it
               ,
               and
               with
               an
               out
               stretched
               arm
               bring
               it
               before
               you
               in
               a
               right
               line
               with
               your
               shoulder
               ,
               holding
               the
               Bayonet
               ,
               the
               thumb
               upwards
               ,
               and
               the
               flat
               of
               the
               blade
               toward
               your
               body
               .
               21.
               
               
                 Screw
                 your
                 Bayonets
                 in
                 the
                 Muzzels
                 :
              
               Put
               your
               Bayonet
               in
               the
               barrel
               ,
               turning
               about
               the
               guard
               towards
               you
               ,
               that
               it
               may
               lie
               fast
               ,
               and
               flat
               ,
               take
               hold
               of
               the
               muzzel
               of
               your
               Fire-lock
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               the
               thumb
               upwards
               ,
               thrusting
               it
               with
               both
               arms
               nimbly
               from
               your
               body
               .
               22.
               
               
                 Rest
                 your
                 Bayonets
              
               :
               Mount
               your
               Bayonets
               with
               both
               hands
               ,
               turning
               at
               the
               same
               time
               ,
               
               without
               resting
               upon
               the
               left
               heel
               ,
               to
               the
               right
               ;
               as
               you
               face
               let
               go
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               bring
               it
               under
               the
               cock
               ,
               turning
               the
               barrel
               towards
               your
               body
               ,
               then
               fall
               back
               hand
               and
               foot
               ,
               and
               keep
               the
               posture
               shewn
               in
               resting
               your
               Musket
               .
               23.
               
               
                 Charge
                 your
                 Bayonets
              
               :
               Bring
               your
               Bayonet
               nimbly
               up
               with
               both
               hands
               ;
               and
               bringing
               up
               of
               your
               right
               foot
               ,
               in
               which
               bringing
               up
               ,
               you
               bring
               your
               right
               hand
               under
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               butt
               rest
               on
               your
               fingers
               ,
               the
               the
               thumb
               outwards
               upon
               the
               but
               end
               ,
               fall
               back
               with
               your
               right
               foot
               ,
               charge
               your
               Bayonet
               breast
               high
               ,
               in
               which
               charging
               the
               butt
               end
               lies
               in
               a
               full
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               the
               thumb
               upon
               it
               .
               24.
               
               
                 Cast
                 about
                 your
                 Bayonets
                 to
                 the
                 left
                 side
                 :
              
               Bring
               up
               your
               Fire-lock
               straight
               before
               you
               ,
               with
               the
               bringing
               up
               your
               right
               Foot
               ;
               letting
               loose
               at
               the
               same
               time
               your
               right
               hand
               from
               the
               butt
               ,
               and
               bring
               it
               under
               the
               cock
               ,
               turn
               your
               Fire-lock
               with
               both
               hands
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               barrel
               comes
               outwards
               ,
               then
               do
               as
               in
               casting
               about
               the
               Musket
               .
               25.
               
               
                 Recover
                 your
                 Bayonets
              
               :
               Bring
               your
               Bayonet
               with
               both
               hands
               to
               your
               body
               ,
               draw
               it
               out
               of
               the
               barrel
               ,
               hold
               it
               out
               with
               a
               stretched
               arm
               as
               before
               26.
               
               
                 Put
                 up
                 your
                 Bayonets
              
               :
               Put
               your
               Bayonet
               into
               the
               Scabbard
               ,
               then
               take
               hold
               of
               your
               Fire-lock
               with
               your
               right
               hand
               by
               the
               muzzel
               ,
               thrusting
               it
               from
               you
               ,
               as
               hath
               been
               shewn
               .
               27.
               
               
                 Half
                 cock
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               Bring
               your
               Fire-lock
               with
               both
               hands
               mounted
               before
               
               your
               body
               ,
               facing
               to
               the
               right
               upon
               the
               left
               heel
               ,
               in
               which
               turning
               you
               let
               go
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               take
               hold
               of
               the
               cock
               with
               your
               right
               thumb
               and
               proceed
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               28.
               
               
                 Blow
                 your
                 Pans
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               29.
               
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Prime●s
              
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               ,
               only
               the
               muzzle
               held
               a
               little
               lower
               .
               30.
               
               Prime
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               31.
               
               
                 Shut
                 your
                 Pan
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               32.
               
               
                 Cast
                 about
                 to
                 Charge
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               33.
               
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Cartridges
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               34.
               
               
                 Open
                 your
                 Cartridges
              
               :
               Bringing
               the
               Cartridge
               to
               your
               mouth
               bite
               of
               the
               top
               and
               bring
               it
               again
               to
               its
               place
               ,
               holding
               the
               Cartridge
               with
               the
               thumb
               upwards
               .
               35.
               
               
                 Charge
                 with
                 your
                 Cartridges
              
               :
               Put
               it
               into
               the
               barrel
               ,
               keeping
               your
               two
               foremost
               fingers
               on
               the
               barrel
               ,
               till
               the
               next
               Command
               .
               36.
               
               
                 Draw
                 forth
                 your
                 Scourer
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               37.
               
               
                 Shorten
                 them
                 to
                 an
                 Inch
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               38.
               
               
                 Ram
                 down
                 Powder
                 and
                 Ball
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               39.
               
               
                 Withdraw
                 your
                 Scourers
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               40.
               
               
                 Shorten
                 them
                 to
                 a
                 handful
              
               :
               as
               in
               the
               Musket
               .
               41.
               
               
                 Return
                 your
                 Scouerers
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               42.
               
               
                 Poise
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               43.
               
               
                 Shoulder
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               44.
               
               
                 Rest
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               45.
               
               
                 Order
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               .
               46.
               
               
                 Laydown
                 your
                 Fire
                 lock
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Mus●et
               .
               47.
               
               
                 Quit
                 your
                 Fire
                 lock
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Mus●et
               .
               48.
               
               
                 Handle
                 your
                 Fire
                 lock
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               49.
               
               
                 Order
                 
                 your
                 Fire-lock
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Musket
               50
               
                 Rest
                 your
                 Fire
                 lock
              
               :
               as
               with
               the
               Mus●et
               .
               51.
               
               
                 Club
                 your
                 Fire
                 locks
              
               :
               Keep
               your
               Fire-lock
               f●rm
               in
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               bring
               up
               the
               right
               foot
               at
               the
               same
               time
               that
               the
               butt-end
               is
               upwards
               ,
               and
               the
               muzzel
               downwards
               ;
               at
               once
               ta●ing
               hold
               of
               it
               with
               the
               right
               hand
               about
               a
               foot
               from
               the
               muzzel
               ,
               that
               the
               right
               thumb
               come
               upwards
               ,
               and
               the
               left
               downwards
               ,
               then
               let
               loose
               the
               left
               hand
               ,
               and
               ta●e
               hold
               again
               at
               the
               same
               time
               with
               a
               full
               left
               hand
               an
               inch
               from
               the
               muzzel
               ,
               hold
               it
               with
               outstretched
               arms
               against
               the
               left
               shoulder
               ,
               and
               bring
               it
               upon
               your
               shoulder
               ,
               with
               the
               Lock
               upwards
               ,
               quit
               your
               right
               hand
               nimbly
               and
               let
               it
               hang
               down
               by
               your
               side
               .
               52.
               
               
                 Rest
                 your
                 Firelock
              
               :
               Turn
               the
               ●ire-l●c●
               with
               your
               left
               hand
               inwards
               ,
               and
               at
               the
               same
               time
               take
               hold
               with
               the
               right
               above
               the
               left
               ,
               the
               thumb
               upwards
               ,
               and
               the
               elbows
               in
               a
               streight
               line
               ,
               bring
               the
               same
               nimbly
               with
               both
               hands
               before
               your
               body
               ,
               then
               let
               loose
               your
               left
               hand
               ,
               sin●ing
               the
               right
               hand
               and
               Fire-lock
               a
               little
               ,
               and
               ta●ing
               it
               at
               the
               same
               time
               with
               the
               left
               hand
               turned
               ,
               both
               the
               thumbs
               turned
               one
               against
               another
               ,
               then
               loose
               your
               right
               hand
               ,
               and
               turning
               the
               Fire-lock
               ,
               bring
               the
               butt
               end
               down
               ,
               and
               rest
               your
               Fire-loc●
               .
               53.
               
               
                 Shoulder
                 your
                 Fire-lock
              
               :
               First
               poise
               your
               Fire
               lock
               bringing
               up
               your
               right
               foot
               at
               the
               same
               time
               ,
               then
               meeting
               it
               with
               your
               left
               ,
               lay
               it
               on
               your
               shoulder
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Take
               heed
               to
               make
               ready
               to
               give
               fire
               at
               three
               words
               of
               Command
               .
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Make
                   Ready
                
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 done
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 first
                 Explanations
                 is
                 shewn
                 at
                 large
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Present
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 done
                 as
                 in
                 Explanation
                 4
                 and
                 5.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Fire
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 done
                 as
                 in
                 Explanation
                 6.
                 and
                 7.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               Take
               heed
               to
               make
               ready
               to
               Fire
               ,
               and
               Deliver
               your
               Granades
               at
               three
               words
               of
               Command
               .
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Make
                   Ready
                
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 done
                 as
                 is
                 shewn
                 from
                 Explanation
                 8.
                 to
                 13.
                 
                 Inclusive
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Blow
                   your
                   Matches
                
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 done
                 as
                 in
                 Explanation
                 14.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 
                   Fire
                   ,
                   and
                   Deliver
                   your
                   Granades
                   :
                
                 This
                 is
                 done
                 as
                 in
                 Explanation
                 15.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               Take
               heed
               to
               make
               ready
               to
               use
               your
               Bayonets
               .
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Make
                   Ready
                
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 shewn
                 as
                 from
                 Explanation
                 16.
                 to
                 22.
                 
                 Inclusive
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 
                   Charge
                   your
                   Bayonets
                
                 :
                 This
                 is
                 done
                 in
                 Explanation
                 23.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               Take
               heed
               to
               make
               ready
               your
               Fire-locks
               again
               .
            
             
               
                 Make
                 ready
                 your
                 Fire-locks
              
               :
               This
               is
               done
               at
               large
               in
               this
               Exercise
               ,
               from
               Explanation
               24.
               to
               Explanation
               27.
               
               Inclusive
               .
            
             
               FINIS
               .